1% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files. 2% 3% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex. 4\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi 5% 6\def\texinfoversion{2021-11-01.16} 7% 8% Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990-2021 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 9% 10% This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or 11% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as 12% published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the 13% License, or (at your option) any later version. 14% 15% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be 16% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty 17% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU 18% General Public License for more details. 19% 20% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License 21% along with this program. If not, see <https://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. 22% 23% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing 24% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without 25% restriction. This Exception is an additional permission under section 7 26% of the GNU General Public License, version 3 ("GPLv3"). 27% 28% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug 29% reports; you can get the latest version from: 30% https://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/ (the Texinfo release area), or 31% https://ftpmirror.gnu.org/texinfo/ (same, via a mirror), or 32% https://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page) 33% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out 34% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check. 35% 36% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include a 37% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the 38% problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated. 39% 40% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the 41% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple 42% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this: 43% tex foo.texi 44% texindex foo.?? 45% tex foo.texi 46% tex foo.texi 47% dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps. 48% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct. 49% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more 50% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary. 51% 52% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some 53% extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the 54% full Texinfo distribution. 55% 56% The GNU Texinfo home page is https://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo. 57 58 59\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:} 60 61% If in a .fmt file, print the version number 62% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because 63% they might have appeared in the input file name. 64\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}% 65 \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active} 66 67% LaTeX's \typeout. This ensures that the messages it is used for 68% are identical in format to the corresponding ones from latex/pdflatex. 69\def\typeout{\immediate\write17}% 70 71\chardef\other=12 72 73% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo. 74% For @tex, we can use \tabalign. 75\let\+ = \relax 76 77% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine. 78\let\ptexb=\b 79\let\ptexbullet=\bullet 80\let\ptexc=\c 81\let\ptexcomma=\, 82\let\ptexdot=\. 83\let\ptexdots=\dots 84\let\ptexend=\end 85\let\ptexequiv=\equiv 86\let\ptexexclam=\! 87\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote 88\let\ptexgtr=> 89\let\ptexhat=^ 90\let\ptexi=\i 91\let\ptexindent=\indent 92\let\ptexinsert=\insert 93\let\ptexlbrace=\{ 94\let\ptexless=< 95\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite 96\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent 97\let\ptexplus=+ 98\let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright 99\let\ptexrbrace=\} 100\let\ptexslash=\/ 101\let\ptexsp=\sp 102\let\ptexstar=\* 103\let\ptexsup=\sup 104\let\ptext=\t 105\let\ptextop=\top 106{\catcode`\'=\active \global\let\ptexquoteright'}% active in plain's math mode 107 108% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it 109% starts a new line in the output. 110\newlinechar = `^^J 111 112% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error 113% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. 114% 115\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined 116 \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0. 117\else 118 \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space} 119\fi 120 121% Set up fixed words for English if not already set. 122\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi 123\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi 124\ifx\putworderror\undefined \gdef\putworderror{error}\fi 125\ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi 126\ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi 127\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi 128\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi 129\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi 130\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi 131\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi 132\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi 133\ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi 134\ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi 135\ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi 136\ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi 137\ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi 138\ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi 139\ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi 140\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi 141\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi 142% 143\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi 144\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi 145\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi 146\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi 147\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi 148\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi 149\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi 150\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi 151\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi 152\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi 153\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi 154\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi 155% 156\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi 157\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi 158\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi 159\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi 160\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi 161 162% Give the space character the catcode for a space. 163\def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =10\relax} 164 165% Likewise for ^^M, the end of line character. 166\def\endlineisspace{\catcode13=10\relax} 167 168\chardef\dashChar = `\- 169\chardef\slashChar = `\/ 170\chardef\underChar = `\_ 171 172% Ignore a token. 173% 174\def\gobble#1{} 175 176% The following is used inside several \edef's. 177\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname} 178 179% Hyphenation fixes. 180\hyphenation{ 181 Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script 182 ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps 183 data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script 184 man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm 185 par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces 186 spell-ing spell-ings 187 stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space 188 wide-spread wrap-around 189} 190 191% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file 192% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here, 193% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make 194% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log 195% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX. 196% 197\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% 198\def\loggingall{% 199 \tracingstats2 200 \tracingpages1 201 \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex 202 \tracingparagraphs1 203 \tracingoutput1 204 \tracingmacros2 205 \tracingrestores1 206 \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen 207 \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined\else % etex gives us more logging 208 \tracingscantokens1 209 \tracingifs1 210 \tracinggroups1 211 \tracingnesting2 212 \tracingassigns1 213 \fi 214 \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex 215 \errorcontextlines16 216}% 217 218% @errormsg{MSG}. Do the index-like expansions on MSG, but if things 219% aren't perfect, it's not the end of the world, being an error message, 220% after all. 221% 222\def\errormsg{\begingroup \indexnofonts \doerrormsg} 223\def\doerrormsg#1{\errmessage{#1}} 224 225% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing 226% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space. 227% 228\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount 229 \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi} 230\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount 231 \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi} 232\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount 233 \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi} 234 235% Output routine 236% 237 238% For a final copy, take out the rectangles 239% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided 240% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin). 241% 242\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt } 243 244\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines 245\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in 246 247% Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor. 248% We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark. 249% This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark. 250% 251% A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct. 252% \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase. 253% 254% Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter 255% (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top 256% of a page, or that at the bottom of a page. 257 258% \domark is called twice inside \chapmacro, to add one 259% mark before the section break, and one after. 260% In the second call \prevchapterdefs is the same as \currentchapterdefs, 261% and \prevsectiondefs is the same as \currentsectiondefs. 262% Then if the page is not broken at the mark, some of the previous 263% section appears on the page, and we can get the name of this section 264% from \firstmark for @everyheadingmarks top. 265% @everyheadingmarks bottom uses \botmark. 266% 267% See page 260 of The TeXbook. 268\def\domark{% 269 \toks0=\expandafter{\currentchapterdefs}% 270 \toks2=\expandafter{\currentsectiondefs}% 271 \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}% 272 \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}% 273 \toks8=\expandafter{\currentcolordefs}% 274 \mark{% 275 \the\toks0 \the\toks2 % 0: marks for @everyheadingmarks top 276 \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6 % 1: for @everyheadingmarks bottom 277 \noexpand\else \the\toks8 % 2: color marks 278 }% 279} 280 281% \gettopheadingmarks, \getbottomheadingmarks, 282% \getcolormarks - extract needed part of mark. 283% 284% \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title 285% page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us 286% the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g., 287% @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very 288% first @chapter. 289\def\gettopheadingmarks{% 290 \ifcase0\the\savedtopmark\fi 291 \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi 292} 293\def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi} 294\def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\the\savedtopmark\fi} 295 296% Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors. 297\def\currentchapterdefs{} 298\def\currentsectiondefs{} 299\def\currentsection{} 300\def\prevchapterdefs{} 301\def\prevsectiondefs{} 302\def\currentcolordefs{} 303 304% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. 305\newdimen\bindingoffset 306\newdimen\normaloffset 307\newdimen\txipagewidth \newdimen\txipageheight 308 309% Main output routine. 310% 311\chardef\PAGE = 255 312\newtoks\defaultoutput 313\defaultoutput = {\savetopmark\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} 314\output=\expandafter{\the\defaultoutput} 315 316\newbox\headlinebox 317\newbox\footlinebox 318 319% When outputting the double column layout for indices, an output routine 320% is run several times, which hides the original value of \topmark. This 321% can lead to a page heading being output and duplicating the chapter heading 322% of the index. Hence, save the contents of \topmark at the beginning of 323% the output routine. The saved contents are valid until we actually 324% \shipout a page. 325% 326% (We used to run a short output routine to actually set \topmark and 327% \firstmark to the right values, but if this was called with an empty page 328% containing whatsits for writing index entries, the whatsits would be thrown 329% away and the index auxiliary file would remain empty.) 330% 331\newtoks\savedtopmark 332\newif\iftopmarksaved 333\topmarksavedtrue 334\def\savetopmark{% 335 \iftopmarksaved\else 336 \global\savedtopmark=\expandafter{\topmark}% 337 \global\topmarksavedtrue 338 \fi 339} 340 341% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. 342% \shipout a vbox for a single page, adding an optional header, footer 343% and footnote. This also causes index entries for this page to be written 344% to the auxiliary files. 345% 346\def\onepageout#1{% 347 \hoffset=\normaloffset 348 % 349 \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset 350 \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi 351 % 352 \checkchapterpage 353 % 354 % Retrieve the information for the headings from the marks in the page, 355 % and call Plain TeX's \makeheadline and \makefootline, which use the 356 % values in \headline and \footline. 357 % 358 % Common context changes for both heading and footing. 359 % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in 360 % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code). 361 \def\commonheadfootline{\let\hsize=\txipagewidth \texinfochars} 362 % 363 \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi 364 \global\setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\commonheadfootline \makeheadline}% 365 \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi 366 \global\setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\commonheadfootline \makefootline}% 367 % 368 {% 369 % Set context for writing to auxiliary files like index files. 370 % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to 371 % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends 372 % before the \shipout runs. 373 % 374 \atdummies % don't expand commands in the output. 375 \turnoffactive 376 \shipout\vbox{% 377 % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page. 378 \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi 379 % 380 \unvbox\headlinebox 381 \pagebody{#1}% 382 \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt 383 % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty. 384 % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.) 385 % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect. 386 \vskip 24pt 387 \unvbox\footlinebox 388 \fi 389 % 390 }% 391 }% 392 \global\topmarksavedfalse 393 \advancepageno 394 \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi 395} 396 397\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen 398 399% Main part of page, including any footnotes 400\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\txipageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} 401{\catcode`\@ =11 402\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi 403% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala) 404\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present 405 \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi 406\dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax 407\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi 408\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} 409} 410 411% Check if we are on the first page of a chapter. Used for printing headings. 412\newif\ifchapterpage 413\def\checkchapterpage{% 414 % Get the chapter that was current at the end of the last page 415 \ifcase1\the\savedtopmark\fi 416 \let\prevchaptername\thischaptername 417 % 418 \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi 419 \let\curchaptername\thischaptername 420 % 421 \ifx\curchaptername\prevchaptername 422 \chapterpagefalse 423 \else 424 \chapterpagetrue 425 \fi 426} 427 428% Argument parsing 429 430% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of 431% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a 432% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument. 433% For example, \def\foo{\parsearg\fooxxx}. 434% 435\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}} 436\def\parseargusing#1#2{% 437 \def\argtorun{#2}% 438 \begingroup 439 \obeylines 440 \spaceisspace 441 #1% 442 \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below. 443} 444 445{\obeylines % 446 \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{% 447 \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg. 448 \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm% 449 }% 450} 451 452% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment. Pass the result on to 453% \argcheckspaces. 454\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm} 455\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm} 456 457% Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space. 458% 459% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g., 460% @end itemize @c foo 461% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed 462% by \finishparsearg. 463% 464\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M} 465\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M} 466\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{% 467 \def\temp{#3}% 468 \ifx\temp\empty 469 % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp: 470 \let\temp\finishparsearg 471 \else 472 \let\temp\argcheckspaces 473 \fi 474 % Put the space token in: 475 \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm 476} 477 478% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so 479% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation. 480% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now, 481% just before passing the control to \argtorun. 482% (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is 483% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger 484% that a pair of braces would be stripped. 485% 486% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token. 487% 488\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}} 489 490 491% \parseargdef - define a command taking an argument on the line 492% 493% \parseargdef\foo{...} 494% is roughly equivalent to 495% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo} 496% \def\Xfoo#1{...} 497\def\parseargdef#1{% 498 \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1% 499} 500\def\doparseargdef#1#2{% 501 \def#2{\parsearg#1}% 502 \def#1##1% 503} 504 505% Several utility definitions with active space: 506{ 507 \obeyspaces 508 \gdef\obeyedspace{ } 509 510 % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword 511 % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this 512 % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input 513 % should produce a line of output anyway. 514 % 515 \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie} 516 517 % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces 518 % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the 519 % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ). 520 \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space} 521} 522 523 524\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next} 525 526% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this: 527% 528% \envdef\foo{...} 529% \def\Efoo{...} 530% 531% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the 532% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also 533% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks 534% whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be 535% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected. 536% 537% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they 538% are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The 539% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this 540% special case.) 541 542 543% At run-time, environments start with this: 544\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}} 545% initialize 546\let\thisenv\empty 547 548% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'': 549\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} 550\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} 551 552% Check whether we're in the right environment: 553\def\checkenv#1{% 554 \def\temp{#1}% 555 \ifx\thisenv\temp 556 \else 557 \badenverr 558 \fi 559} 560 561% Environment mismatch, #1 expected: 562\def\badenverr{% 563 \errhelp = \EMsimple 564 \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp, 565 not \inenvironment\thisenv}% 566} 567\def\inenvironment#1{% 568 \ifx#1\empty 569 outside of any environment% 570 \else 571 in environment \expandafter\string#1% 572 \fi 573} 574 575 576% @end foo calls \checkenv and executes the definition of \Efoo. 577\parseargdef\end{% 578 \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname 579 \else 580 % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal. 581 \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname 582 \csname E#1\endcsname 583 \endgroup 584 \fi 585} 586 587\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.} 588 589 590% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space 591% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space 592% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and 593% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the 594% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph. 595{\catcode`@ = 11 596 % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble 597 % if the definition is written into an index file. 598 \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M 599 \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ } 600} 601 602% @: forces normal size whitespace following. 603\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } 604 605% @* forces a line break. 606\def\*{\unskip\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces} 607 608% @/ allows a line break. 609\let\/=\allowbreak 610 611% @. is an end-of-sentence period. 612\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 613 614% @! is an end-of-sentence bang. 615\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 616 617% @? is an end-of-sentence query. 618\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 619 620% @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation. 621% 622\def\onword{on} 623\def\offword{off} 624% 625\parseargdef\frenchspacing{% 626 \def\temp{#1}% 627 \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing 628 \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing 629 \else 630 \errhelp = \EMsimple 631 \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on|off}% 632 \fi\fi 633} 634 635% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the 636% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would 637% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph. 638\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}} 639 640% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing 641% it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box 642% to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for 643% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is 644% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large, 645% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and 646% the text is small, which looks bad. 647% 648% Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can 649% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it 650% does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an 651% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The 652% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit 653% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex). 654% 655\newbox\groupbox 656\def\vfilllimit{0.7} 657% 658\envdef\group{% 659 \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else 660 \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp 661 \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}% 662 \fi 663 \startsavinginserts 664 % 665 \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup 666 % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as 667 % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an 668 % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after 669 % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group 670 % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo 671 % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text. 672 \comment 673} 674% 675% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts 676% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done) 677% \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space 678% above. But it's pretty close. 679\def\Egroup{% 680 % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group 681 % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth. 682 \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar. 683 \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth 684 \egroup % End the \vtop. 685 \addgroupbox 686 \prevdepth = \dimen1 687 \checkinserts 688} 689 690\def\addgroupbox{ 691 % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box. 692 \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox 693 % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less). 694 \dimen2 = \txipageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal 695 % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big 696 % group, force a page break. 697 \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2 698 \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\txipageheight 699 \page 700 \fi 701 \fi 702 \box\groupbox 703} 704 705% 706% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help 707% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'. 708% 709\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{% 710group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J% 711where each line of input produces a line of output.} 712 713% @need space-in-mils 714% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining. 715 716\newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in 717 718\parseargdef\need{% 719 % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a 720 % paragraph. 721 \par 722 % 723 % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless. 724 \dimen0 = #1\mil 725 \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox 726 \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox 727 \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2 728 % 729 % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the 730 % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line. 731 % And a page break here is fine. 732 \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}% 733 % 734 % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the 735 % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the 736 % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider 737 % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the 738 % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999. 739 % 740 % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the 741 % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in 742 % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which 743 % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing 744 % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an 745 % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real 746 % document, then we can reconsider our strategy. 747 \penalty9999 748 % 749 % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not. 750 \kern -#1\mil 751 % 752 % Do not allow a page break right after this kern. 753 \nobreak 754 \fi 755} 756 757% @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented). 758 759\let\br = \par 760 761% @page forces the start of a new page. 762% 763\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} 764 765% @exdent text.... 766% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin 767 768% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment. 769% That's how much \exdent should take out. 770\newskip\exdentamount 771 772% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun. 773\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break} 774 775% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example. 776\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount 777 \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} 778 779% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current 780% paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion 781% class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. Not documented, written for gawk manual. 782% 783\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm 784\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox} 785% 786\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{% 787 \nobreak 788 \kern-\strutdepth 789 \vtop to \strutdepth{% 790 \baselineskip=\strutdepth 791 \vss 792 % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to 793 % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size. 794 \ifx#1l% 795 \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}% 796 \else 797 \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}% 798 \fi 799 \null 800 }% 801}} 802\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l} 803\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r} 804% 805% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]} 806% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right; 807% else use TEXT for both). 808% 809\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish} 810\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing. 811 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 812 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 813 \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts 814 \def\righttext{#2}% 815 \else 816 \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text 817 \def\righttext{#1}% 818 \fi 819 % 820 \ifodd\pageno 821 \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin 822 \else 823 \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}% 824 \fi 825 \temp 826} 827 828% @include FILE -- \input text of FILE. 829% 830\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz} 831\def\includezzz#1{% 832 \pushthisfilestack 833 \def\thisfile{#1}% 834 {% 835 \makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE. 836 \turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion 837 \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. 838 \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @include of #1^^J}% 839 \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }% 840 % 841 % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes 842 % definitions, etc. 843 \expandafter 844 }\temp 845 \popthisfilestack 846} 847\def\filenamecatcodes{% 848 \catcode`\\=\other 849 \catcode`~=\other 850 \catcode`^=\other 851 \catcode`_=\other 852 \catcode`|=\other 853 \catcode`<=\other 854 \catcode`>=\other 855 \catcode`+=\other 856 \catcode`-=\other 857 \catcode`\`=\other 858 \catcode`\'=\other 859} 860 861\def\pushthisfilestack{% 862 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm 863} 864\def\pushthisfilestackX{% 865 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm 866} 867\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {% 868 \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}% 869} 870 871\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty} 872\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error: 873 the stack of filenames is empty.}} 874% 875\def\thisfile{} 876 877% @center line 878% outputs that line, centered. 879% 880\parseargdef\center{% 881 \ifhmode 882 \let\centersub\centerH 883 \else 884 \let\centersub\centerV 885 \fi 886 \centersub{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}% 887 \let\centersub\relax % don't let the definition persist, just in case 888} 889\def\centerH#1{{% 890 \hfil\break 891 \advance\hsize by -\leftskip 892 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip 893 \line{#1}% 894 \break 895}} 896% 897\newcount\centerpenalty 898\def\centerV#1{% 899 % The idea here is the same as in \startdefun, \cartouche, etc.: if 900 % @center is the first thing after a section heading, we need to wipe 901 % out the negative parskip inserted by \sectionheading, but still 902 % prevent a page break here. 903 \centerpenalty = \lastpenalty 904 \ifnum\centerpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \fi 905 \ifnum\centerpenalty>9999 \penalty\centerpenalty \fi 906 \line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}% 907} 908 909% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space 910% 911\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip} 912 913% @comment ...line which is ignored... 914% @c is the same as @comment 915% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment 916 917 918\def\c{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\active% 919\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other% 920\cxxx} 921{\catcode`\^^M=\active \gdef\cxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}} 922% 923\let\comment\c 924 925% @paragraphindent NCHARS 926% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough. 927% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'. 928% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though. 929% 930\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords 931\def\noneword{none} 932% 933\parseargdef\paragraphindent{% 934 \def\temp{#1}% 935 \ifx\temp\asisword 936 \else 937 \ifx\temp\noneword 938 \defaultparindent = 0pt 939 \else 940 \defaultparindent = #1em 941 \fi 942 \fi 943 \parindent = \defaultparindent 944} 945 946% @exampleindent NCHARS 947% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent. 948% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but 949% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent. 950\parseargdef\exampleindent{% 951 \def\temp{#1}% 952 \ifx\temp\asisword 953 \else 954 \ifx\temp\noneword 955 \lispnarrowing = 0pt 956 \else 957 \lispnarrowing = #1em 958 \fi 959 \fi 960} 961 962% @firstparagraphindent WORD 963% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph 964% after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such 965% paragraphs. 966% 967% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling 968% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do. 969% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD. 970% By default, we suppress indentation. 971% 972\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent} 973\def\insertword{insert} 974% 975\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{% 976 \def\temp{#1}% 977 \ifx\temp\noneword 978 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent 979 \else\ifx\temp\insertword 980 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax 981 \else 982 \errhelp = \EMsimple 983 \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}% 984 \fi\fi 985} 986 987% Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to 988% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty. 989% 990% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next 991% paragraph. 992% 993\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{% 994 \gdef\indent {\restorefirstparagraphindent \indent}% 995 \gdef\noindent{\restorefirstparagraphindent \noindent}% 996 \global\everypar = {\kern -\parindent \restorefirstparagraphindent}% 997} 998% 999\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{% 1000 \global\let\indent = \ptexindent 1001 \global\let\noindent = \ptexnoindent 1002 \global\everypar = {}% 1003} 1004 1005% leave vertical mode without cancelling any first paragraph indent 1006\gdef\imageindent{% 1007 \toks0=\everypar 1008 \everypar={}% 1009 \ptexnoindent 1010 \global\everypar=\toks0 1011} 1012 1013 1014% @refill is a no-op. 1015\let\refill=\relax 1016 1017% @setfilename INFO-FILENAME - ignored 1018\let\setfilename=\comment 1019 1020% @bye. 1021\outer\def\bye{\chappager\pagelabels\tracingstats=1\ptexend} 1022 1023 1024\message{pdf,} 1025% adobe `portable' document format 1026\newcount\tempnum 1027\newcount\lnkcount 1028\newtoks\filename 1029\newcount\filenamelength 1030\newcount\pgn 1031\newtoks\toksA 1032\newtoks\toksB 1033\newtoks\toksC 1034\newtoks\toksD 1035\newbox\boxA 1036\newbox\boxB 1037\newcount\countA 1038\newif\ifpdf 1039\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest 1040 1041% 1042% For LuaTeX 1043% 1044 1045\newif\iftxiuseunicodedestname 1046\txiuseunicodedestnamefalse % For pdfTeX etc. 1047 1048\ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 1049\else 1050 % Use Unicode destination names 1051 \txiuseunicodedestnametrue 1052 % Escape PDF strings with converting UTF-16 from UTF-8 1053 \begingroup 1054 \catcode`\%=12 1055 \directlua{ 1056 function UTF16oct(str) 1057 tex.sprint(string.char(0x5c) .. '376' .. string.char(0x5c) .. '377') 1058 for c in string.utfvalues(str) do 1059 if c < 0x10000 then 1060 tex.sprint( 1061 string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1062 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o', 1063 math.floor(c / 256), math.floor(c % 256))) 1064 else 1065 c = c - 0x10000 1066 local c_hi = c / 1024 + 0xd800 1067 local c_lo = c % 1024 + 0xdc00 1068 tex.sprint( 1069 string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1070 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1071 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1072 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o', 1073 math.floor(c_hi / 256), math.floor(c_hi % 256), 1074 math.floor(c_lo / 256), math.floor(c_lo % 256))) 1075 end 1076 end 1077 end 1078 } 1079 \endgroup 1080 \def\pdfescapestrutfsixteen#1{\directlua{UTF16oct('\luaescapestring{#1}')}} 1081 % Escape PDF strings without converting 1082 \begingroup 1083 \directlua{ 1084 function PDFescstr(str) 1085 for c in string.bytes(str) do 1086 if c <= 0x20 or c >= 0x80 or c == 0x28 or c == 0x29 or c == 0x5c then 1087 tex.sprint(-2, 1088 string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o', 1089 c)) 1090 else 1091 tex.sprint(-2, string.char(c)) 1092 end 1093 end 1094 end 1095 } 1096 % The -2 in the arguments here gives all the input to TeX catcode 12 1097 % (other) or 10 (space), preventing undefined control sequence errors. See 1098 % https://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/bug-texinfo/2019-08/msg00031.html 1099 % 1100 \endgroup 1101 \def\pdfescapestring#1{\directlua{PDFescstr('\luaescapestring{#1}')}} 1102 \ifnum\luatexversion>84 1103 % For LuaTeX >= 0.85 1104 \def\pdfdest{\pdfextension dest} 1105 \let\pdfoutput\outputmode 1106 \def\pdfliteral{\pdfextension literal} 1107 \def\pdfcatalog{\pdfextension catalog} 1108 \def\pdftexversion{\numexpr\pdffeedback version\relax} 1109 \let\pdfximage\saveimageresource 1110 \let\pdfrefximage\useimageresource 1111 \let\pdflastximage\lastsavedimageresourceindex 1112 \def\pdfendlink{\pdfextension endlink\relax} 1113 \def\pdfoutline{\pdfextension outline} 1114 \def\pdfstartlink{\pdfextension startlink} 1115 \def\pdffontattr{\pdfextension fontattr} 1116 \def\pdfobj{\pdfextension obj} 1117 \def\pdflastobj{\numexpr\pdffeedback lastobj\relax} 1118 \let\pdfpagewidth\pagewidth 1119 \let\pdfpageheight\pageheight 1120 \edef\pdfhorigin{\pdfvariable horigin} 1121 \edef\pdfvorigin{\pdfvariable vorigin} 1122 \fi 1123\fi 1124 1125% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1 1126% can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as being undefined. 1127\ifx\pdfoutput\thisisundefined 1128\else 1129 \ifx\pdfoutput\relax 1130 \else 1131 \ifcase\pdfoutput 1132 \else 1133 \pdftrue 1134 \fi 1135 \fi 1136\fi 1137 1138\newif\ifpdforxetex 1139\pdforxetexfalse 1140\ifpdf 1141 \pdforxetextrue 1142\fi 1143\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined\else 1144 \pdforxetextrue 1145\fi 1146 1147 1148% Output page labels information. 1149% See PDF reference v.1.7 p.594, section 8.3.1. 1150\ifpdf 1151\def\pagelabels{% 1152 \def\title{0 << /P (T-) /S /D >>}% 1153 \edef\roman{\the\romancount << /S /r >>}% 1154 \edef\arabic{\the\arabiccount << /S /D >>}% 1155 % 1156 % Page label ranges must be increasing. Remove any duplicates. 1157 % (There is a slight chance of this being wrong if e.g. there is 1158 % a @contents but no @titlepage, etc.) 1159 % 1160 \ifnum\romancount=0 \def\roman{}\fi 1161 \ifnum\arabiccount=0 \def\title{}% 1162 \else 1163 \ifnum\romancount=\arabiccount \def\roman{}\fi 1164 \fi 1165 % 1166 \ifnum\romancount<\arabiccount 1167 \pdfcatalog{/PageLabels << /Nums [\title \roman \arabic ] >> }\relax 1168 \else 1169 \pdfcatalog{/PageLabels << /Nums [\title \arabic \roman ] >> }\relax 1170 \fi 1171} 1172\else 1173 \let\pagelabels\relax 1174\fi 1175 1176\newcount\pagecount \pagecount=0 1177\newcount\romancount \romancount=0 1178\newcount\arabiccount \arabiccount=0 1179\ifpdf 1180 \let\ptxadvancepageno\advancepageno 1181 \def\advancepageno{% 1182 \ptxadvancepageno\global\advance\pagecount by 1 1183 } 1184\fi 1185 1186 1187% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets, 1188% for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to 1189% double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be 1190% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good. 1191% 1192% See http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html and 1193% related messages. The final outcome is that it is up to the TeX user 1194% to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so 1195% that's what we do. pdftex 1.30.0 (ca.2005) introduced a primitive to 1196% do this reliably, so we use it. 1197 1198% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements, 1199% which we \xdef. 1200\def\txiescapepdf#1{% 1201 \ifx\pdfescapestring\thisisundefined 1202 % No primitive available; should we give a warning or log? 1203 % Many times it won't matter. 1204 \xdef#1{#1}% 1205 \else 1206 % The expandable \pdfescapestring primitive escapes parentheses, 1207 % backslashes, and other special chars. 1208 \xdef#1{\pdfescapestring{#1}}% 1209 \fi 1210} 1211\def\txiescapepdfutfsixteen#1{% 1212 \ifx\pdfescapestrutfsixteen\thisisundefined 1213 % No UTF-16 converting macro available. 1214 \txiescapepdf{#1}% 1215 \else 1216 \xdef#1{\pdfescapestrutfsixteen{#1}}% 1217 \fi 1218} 1219 1220\newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images 1221with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot 1222be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI 1223output) for that.)} 1224 1225\ifpdf 1226 % 1227 % Color manipulation macros using ideas from pdfcolor.tex, 1228 % except using rgb instead of cmyk; the latter is said to render as a 1229 % very dark gray on-screen and a very dark halftone in print, instead 1230 % of actual black. The dark red here is dark enough to print on paper as 1231 % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing. We use 1232 % black by default, though. 1233 \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12} 1234 \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0} 1235 % 1236 % rg sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.); 1237 % RG sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s). 1238 \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 rg #1 RG}} 1239 % 1240 % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly, 1241 % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore. 1242 \def\setcolor#1{% 1243 \xdef\currentcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}% 1244 \domark 1245 \pdfsetcolor{#1}% 1246 } 1247 % 1248 \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack} 1249 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor} 1250 \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor} 1251 \def\currentcolordefs{} 1252 % 1253 \def\makefootline{% 1254 \baselineskip24pt 1255 \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}% 1256 } 1257 % 1258 \def\makeheadline{% 1259 \vbox to 0pt{% 1260 \vskip-22.5pt 1261 \line{% 1262 \vbox to8.5pt{}% 1263 % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks. 1264 \getcolormarks 1265 % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color. 1266 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}% 1267 }% 1268 \vss 1269 }% 1270 \nointerlineskip 1271 } 1272 % 1273 % 1274 \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines} 1275 % 1276 % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto). 1277 \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{% 1278 \def\pdfimagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 1279 \def\pdfimageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 1280 % 1281 % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .pdf, .png, .jpg (among 1282 % others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if 1283 % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a 1284 % bitmap. 1285 \let\pdfimgext=\empty 1286 \begingroup 1287 \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1 1288 \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1 1289 \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1 1290 \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1 1291 \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1 1292 \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1 1293 \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp 1294 \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}% 1295 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}% 1296 \fi 1297 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}% 1298 \fi 1299 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}% 1300 \fi 1301 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}% 1302 \fi 1303 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}% 1304 \fi 1305 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}% 1306 \fi 1307 \closein 1 1308 \endgroup 1309 % 1310 % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is 1311 % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.) 1312 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 1313 \immediate\pdfimage 1314 \else 1315 \immediate\pdfximage 1316 \fi 1317 \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \pdfimagewidth \fi 1318 \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \pdfimageheight \fi 1319 \ifnum\pdftexversion<13 1320 #1.\pdfimgext 1321 \else 1322 {#1.\pdfimgext}% 1323 \fi 1324 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else 1325 \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage 1326 \fi} 1327 % 1328 \def\setpdfdestname#1{{% 1329 % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters 1330 % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title. 1331 \indexnofonts 1332 \makevalueexpandable 1333 \turnoffactive 1334 \iftxiuseunicodedestname 1335 \ifx \declaredencoding \latone 1336 % Pass through Latin-1 characters. 1337 % LuaTeX with byte wise I/O converts Latin-1 characters to Unicode. 1338 \else 1339 \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 1340 % Pass through Unicode characters. 1341 \else 1342 % Use ASCII approximations in destination names. 1343 \passthroughcharsfalse 1344 \fi 1345 \fi 1346 \else 1347 % Use ASCII approximations in destination names. 1348 \passthroughcharsfalse 1349 \fi 1350 \def\pdfdestname{#1}% 1351 \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname 1352 }} 1353 % 1354 \def\setpdfoutlinetext#1{{% 1355 \indexnofonts 1356 \makevalueexpandable 1357 \turnoffactive 1358 \ifx \declaredencoding \latone 1359 % The PDF format can use an extended form of Latin-1 in bookmark 1360 % strings. See Appendix D of the PDF Reference, Sixth Edition, for 1361 % the "PDFDocEncoding". 1362 \passthroughcharstrue 1363 % Pass through Latin-1 characters. 1364 % LuaTeX: Convert to Unicode 1365 % pdfTeX: Use Latin-1 as PDFDocEncoding 1366 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1367 \else 1368 \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 1369 \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 1370 % For pdfTeX with UTF-8. 1371 % TODO: the PDF format can use UTF-16 in bookmark strings, 1372 % but the code for this isn't done yet. 1373 % Use ASCII approximations. 1374 \passthroughcharsfalse 1375 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1376 \else 1377 % For LuaTeX with UTF-8. 1378 % Pass through Unicode characters for title texts. 1379 \passthroughcharstrue 1380 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1381 \fi 1382 \else 1383 % For non-Latin-1 or non-UTF-8 encodings. 1384 % Use ASCII approximations. 1385 \passthroughcharsfalse 1386 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1387 \fi 1388 \fi 1389 % LuaTeX: Convert to UTF-16 1390 % pdfTeX: Use Latin-1 as PDFDocEncoding 1391 \txiescapepdfutfsixteen\pdfoutlinetext 1392 }} 1393 % 1394 \def\pdfmkdest#1{% 1395 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 1396 \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}% 1397 } 1398 % 1399 % used to mark target names; must be expandable. 1400 \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1} 1401 % 1402 % by default, use black for everything. 1403 \def\urlcolor{\rgbBlack} 1404 \def\linkcolor{\rgbBlack} 1405 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink} 1406 % 1407 % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines 1408 % come from Petr Olsak 1409 \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0% 1410 \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi} 1411 \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax 1412 \advance\tempnum by 1 1413 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}} 1414 % 1415 % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the 1416 % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number 1417 % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text, 1418 % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node. 1419 % #4 is the page number 1420 % 1421 \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% 1422 % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the 1423 % page number. We could generate a destination for the section 1424 % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't 1425 % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured. 1426 \setpdfoutlinetext{#1} 1427 \setpdfdestname{#3} 1428 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 1429 \def\pdfdestname{#4}% 1430 \fi 1431 % 1432 \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfdestname}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}% 1433 } 1434 % 1435 \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% 1436 \begingroup 1437 % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline. 1438 \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines 1439 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1440 \def\thischapnum{##2}% 1441 \def\thissecnum{0}% 1442 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1443 }% 1444 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1445 \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}% 1446 \def\thissecnum{##2}% 1447 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1448 }% 1449 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1450 \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}% 1451 \def\thissubsecnum{##2}% 1452 }% 1453 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1454 \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}% 1455 }% 1456 \def\thischapnum{0}% 1457 \def\thissecnum{0}% 1458 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1459 % 1460 % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et 1461 % al. a second time, below. 1462 \def\appentry{\numchapentry}% 1463 \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}% 1464 \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% 1465 \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% 1466 \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}% 1467 \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}% 1468 \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% 1469 \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% 1470 \readdatafile{toc}% 1471 % 1472 % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines. 1473 % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of 1474 % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above. 1475 % 1476 % We use the node names as the destinations. 1477 % 1478 % Currently we prefix the section name with the section number 1479 % for chapter and appendix headings only in order to avoid too much 1480 % horizontal space being required in the PDF viewer. 1481 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1482 \dopdfoutline{##2 ##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1483 \def\unnchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1484 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1485 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1486 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1487 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1488 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1489 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero 1490 \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}% 1491 % 1492 % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of 1493 % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters, 1494 % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from 1495 % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from 1496 % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100. 1497 % 1498 % TODO this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to 1499 % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Too 1500 % much work for too little return. Just use the ASCII equivalents 1501 % we use for the index sort strings. 1502 % 1503 \indexnofonts 1504 \setupdatafile 1505 % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike 1506 % Texinfo index files. So set that up. 1507 \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}% 1508 \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}% 1509 \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash 1510 \input \tocreadfilename 1511 \endgroup 1512 } 1513 {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2 1514 \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other 1515 \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]% 1516 \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]% 1517 ] 1518 % 1519 \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% 1520 \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax 1521 \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces 1522 \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% 1523 \advance\filenamelength by 1 1524 \fi 1525 \nextsp} 1526 \def\getfilename#1{% 1527 \filenamelength=0 1528 % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get 1529 % snagged on things like "@value{foo}". 1530 \edef\temp{#1}% 1531 \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax 1532 } 1533 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 1534 \let \startlink \pdfannotlink 1535 \else 1536 \let \startlink \pdfstartlink 1537 \fi 1538 % make a live url in pdf output. 1539 \def\pdfurl#1{% 1540 \begingroup 1541 % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not 1542 % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context 1543 % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one 1544 % people have actually reported a problem with. 1545 % 1546 \normalturnoffactive 1547 \def\@{@}% 1548 \let\/=\empty 1549 \makevalueexpandable 1550 % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just 1551 % special-casing \var here? 1552 \def\var##1{##1}% 1553 % 1554 \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}% 1555 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 1556 user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}% 1557 \endgroup} 1558 % \pdfgettoks - Surround page numbers in #1 with @pdflink. #1 may 1559 % be a simple number, or a list of numbers in the case of an index 1560 % entry. 1561 \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} 1562 \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} 1563 \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} 1564 \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} 1565 \def\maketoks{% 1566 \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax 1567 \ifx\first0\adn0 1568 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 1569 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 1570 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 1571 \else 1572 \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi 1573 \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else 1574 \let\next=\maketoks 1575 \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} 1576 \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi 1577 \fi 1578 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 1579 \next} 1580 \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% 1581 {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} 1582 \def\pdflink#1{% 1583 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}} 1584 \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink} 1585 \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} 1586\else 1587 % non-pdf mode 1588 \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble 1589 \let\pdfurl = \gobble 1590 \let\endlink = \relax 1591 \let\setcolor = \gobble 1592 \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble 1593 \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax 1594\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput 1595 1596% 1597% For XeTeX 1598% 1599\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 1600\else 1601 % 1602 % XeTeX version check 1603 % 1604 \ifnum\strcmp{\the\XeTeXversion\XeTeXrevision}{0.99996}>-1 1605 % TeX Live 2016 contains XeTeX 0.99996 and xdvipdfmx 20160307. 1606 % It can use the `dvipdfmx:config' special (from TeX Live SVN r40941). 1607 % For avoiding PDF destination name replacement, we use this special 1608 % instead of xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010'. 1609 \special{dvipdfmx:config C 0x0010} 1610 % XeTeX 0.99995+ comes with xdvipdfmx 20160307+. 1611 % It can handle Unicode destination names for PDF. 1612 \txiuseunicodedestnametrue 1613 \else 1614 % XeTeX < 0.99996 (TeX Live < 2016) cannot use the 1615 % `dvipdfmx:config' special. 1616 % So for avoiding PDF destination name replacement, 1617 % xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010' is necessary. 1618 % 1619 % XeTeX < 0.99995 can not handle Unicode destination names for PDF 1620 % because xdvipdfmx 20150315 has a UTF-16 conversion issue. 1621 % It is fixed by xdvipdfmx 20160106 (TeX Live SVN r39753). 1622 \txiuseunicodedestnamefalse 1623 \fi 1624 % 1625 % Color support 1626 % 1627 \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12} 1628 \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0} 1629 % 1630 \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\special{pdf:scolor [#1]}} 1631 % 1632 % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly, 1633 % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore. 1634 \def\setcolor#1{% 1635 \xdef\currentcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}% 1636 \domark 1637 \pdfsetcolor{#1}% 1638 } 1639 % 1640 \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack} 1641 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor} 1642 \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor} 1643 \def\currentcolordefs{} 1644 % 1645 \def\makefootline{% 1646 \baselineskip24pt 1647 \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}% 1648 } 1649 % 1650 \def\makeheadline{% 1651 \vbox to 0pt{% 1652 \vskip-22.5pt 1653 \line{% 1654 \vbox to8.5pt{}% 1655 % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks. 1656 \getcolormarks 1657 % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color. 1658 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}% 1659 }% 1660 \vss 1661 }% 1662 \nointerlineskip 1663 } 1664 % 1665 % PDF outline support 1666 % 1667 % Emulate pdfTeX primitive 1668 \def\pdfdest name#1 xyz{% 1669 \special{pdf:dest (#1) [@thispage /XYZ @xpos @ypos null]}% 1670 } 1671 % 1672 \def\setpdfdestname#1{{% 1673 % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters 1674 % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title. 1675 \indexnofonts 1676 \makevalueexpandable 1677 \turnoffactive 1678 \iftxiuseunicodedestname 1679 % Pass through Unicode characters. 1680 \else 1681 % Use ASCII approximations in destination names. 1682 \passthroughcharsfalse 1683 \fi 1684 \def\pdfdestname{#1}% 1685 \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname 1686 }} 1687 % 1688 \def\setpdfoutlinetext#1{{% 1689 \turnoffactive 1690 % Always use Unicode characters in title texts. 1691 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1692 % For XeTeX, xdvipdfmx converts to UTF-16. 1693 % So we do not convert. 1694 \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinetext 1695 }} 1696 % 1697 \def\pdfmkdest#1{% 1698 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 1699 \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}% 1700 } 1701 % 1702 % by default, use black for everything. 1703 \def\urlcolor{\rgbBlack} 1704 \def\linkcolor{\rgbBlack} 1705 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink} 1706 % 1707 \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% 1708 \setpdfoutlinetext{#1} 1709 \setpdfdestname{#3} 1710 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 1711 \def\pdfdestname{#4}% 1712 \fi 1713 % 1714 \special{pdf:out [-] #2 << /Title (\pdfoutlinetext) /A 1715 << /S /GoTo /D (\pdfdestname) >> >> }% 1716 } 1717 % 1718 \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% 1719 \begingroup 1720 % 1721 % For XeTeX, counts of subentries are not necessary. 1722 % Therefore, we read toc only once. 1723 % 1724 % We use node names as destinations. 1725 % 1726 % Currently we prefix the section name with the section number 1727 % for chapter and appendix headings only in order to avoid too much 1728 % horizontal space being required in the PDF viewer. 1729 \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines 1730 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1731 \dopdfoutline{##2 ##1}{1}{##3}{##4}}% 1732 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1733 \dopdfoutline{##1}{2}{##3}{##4}}% 1734 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1735 \dopdfoutline{##1}{3}{##3}{##4}}% 1736 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1737 \dopdfoutline{##1}{4}{##3}{##4}}% 1738 % 1739 \let\appentry\numchapentry% 1740 \let\appsecentry\numsecentry% 1741 \let\appsubsecentry\numsubsecentry% 1742 \let\appsubsubsecentry\numsubsubsecentry% 1743 \def\unnchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1744 \dopdfoutline{##1}{1}{##3}{##4}}% 1745 \let\unnsecentry\numsecentry% 1746 \let\unnsubsecentry\numsubsecentry% 1747 \let\unnsubsubsecentry\numsubsubsecentry% 1748 % 1749 % For XeTeX, xdvipdfmx converts strings to UTF-16. 1750 % Therefore, the encoding and the language may not be considered. 1751 % 1752 \indexnofonts 1753 \setupdatafile 1754 % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike 1755 % Texinfo index files. So set that up. 1756 \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}% 1757 \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}% 1758 \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash 1759 \input \tocreadfilename 1760 \endgroup 1761 } 1762 {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2 1763 \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other 1764 \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]% 1765 \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]% 1766 ] 1767 1768 \special{pdf:docview << /PageMode /UseOutlines >> } 1769 % ``\special{pdf:tounicode ...}'' is not necessary 1770 % because xdvipdfmx converts strings from UTF-8 to UTF-16 without it. 1771 % However, due to a UTF-16 conversion issue of xdvipdfmx 20150315, 1772 % ``\special{pdf:dest ...}'' cannot handle non-ASCII strings. 1773 % It is fixed by xdvipdfmx 20160106 (TeX Live SVN r39753). 1774% 1775 \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% 1776 \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax 1777 \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces 1778 \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% 1779 \advance\filenamelength by 1 1780 \fi 1781 \nextsp} 1782 \def\getfilename#1{% 1783 \filenamelength=0 1784 % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get 1785 % snagged on things like "@value{foo}". 1786 \edef\temp{#1}% 1787 \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax 1788 } 1789 % make a live url in pdf output. 1790 \def\pdfurl#1{% 1791 \begingroup 1792 % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not 1793 % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context 1794 % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one 1795 % people have actually reported a problem with. 1796 % 1797 \normalturnoffactive 1798 \def\@{@}% 1799 \let\/=\empty 1800 \makevalueexpandable 1801 % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just 1802 % special-casing \var here? 1803 \def\var##1{##1}% 1804 % 1805 \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}% 1806 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] 1807 /Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >> >>}% 1808 \endgroup} 1809 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\special{pdf:eann}} 1810 \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} 1811 \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} 1812 \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} 1813 \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} 1814 \def\maketoks{% 1815 \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax 1816 \ifx\first0\adn0 1817 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 1818 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 1819 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 1820 \else 1821 \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi 1822 \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else 1823 \let\next=\maketoks 1824 \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} 1825 \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi 1826 \fi 1827 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 1828 \next} 1829 \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% 1830 {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} 1831 \def\pdflink#1{% 1832 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] 1833 /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A << /S /GoTo /D (#1) >> >>}% 1834 \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink} 1835 \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} 1836% 1837 % 1838 % @image support 1839 % 1840 % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto). 1841 \def\doxeteximage#1#2#3{% 1842 \def\xeteximagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 1843 \def\xeteximageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 1844 % 1845 % XeTeX (and the PDF format) supports .pdf, .png, .jpg (among 1846 % others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if 1847 % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a 1848 % bitmap. 1849 \let\xeteximgext=\empty 1850 \begingroup 1851 \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1 1852 \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1 1853 \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1 1854 \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1 1855 \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1 1856 \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1 1857 \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for XeTeX}% 1858 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{JPG}% 1859 \fi 1860 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{jpeg}% 1861 \fi 1862 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{jpg}% 1863 \fi 1864 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{png}% 1865 \fi 1866 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{PDF}% 1867 \fi 1868 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{pdf}% 1869 \fi 1870 \closein 1 1871 \endgroup 1872 % 1873 % Putting an \hbox around the image can prevent an over-long line 1874 % after the image. 1875 \hbox\bgroup 1876 \def\xetexpdfext{pdf}% 1877 \ifx\xeteximgext\xetexpdfext 1878 \XeTeXpdffile "#1".\xeteximgext "" 1879 \else 1880 \def\xetexpdfext{PDF}% 1881 \ifx\xeteximgext\xetexpdfext 1882 \XeTeXpdffile "#1".\xeteximgext "" 1883 \else 1884 \XeTeXpicfile "#1".\xeteximgext "" 1885 \fi 1886 \fi 1887 \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \xeteximagewidth \fi 1888 \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \xeteximageheight \fi \relax 1889 \egroup 1890 } 1891\fi 1892 1893 1894% 1895\message{fonts,} 1896 1897% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size 1898% correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers 1899% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined. 1900% 1901\def\lineskipfactor{.08333} 1902\def\strutheightpercent{.70833} 1903\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167} 1904% 1905% can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this. 1906\def\baselinefactor{1} 1907% 1908\newdimen\textleading 1909\def\setleading#1{% 1910 \dimen0 = #1\relax 1911 \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0 1912 \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip 1913 \normalbaselines 1914 \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{% 1915 \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip 1916 depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip 1917 }% 1918} 1919 1920% PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap. 1921% 1922% do nothing with this by default. 1923\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble 1924\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble 1925\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble 1926 1927% if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps. 1928% (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run 1929% older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.) 1930\ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\thisisundefined \else 1931 \begingroup 1932 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1933 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1934%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1935%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1936%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0) 1937%%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0) 1938%%Version: 1.000 1939%%EndComments 1940/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 194112 dict begin 1942begincmap 1943/CIDSystemInfo 1944<< /Registry (TeX) 1945/Ordering (OT1) 1946/Supplement 0 1947>> def 1948/CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def 1949/CMapType 2 def 19501 begincodespacerange 1951<00> <7F> 1952endcodespacerange 19538 beginbfrange 1954<00> <01> <0393> 1955<09> <0A> <03A8> 1956<23> <26> <0023> 1957<28> <3B> <0028> 1958<3F> <5B> <003F> 1959<5D> <5E> <005D> 1960<61> <7A> <0061> 1961<7B> <7C> <2013> 1962endbfrange 196340 beginbfchar 1964<02> <0398> 1965<03> <039B> 1966<04> <039E> 1967<05> <03A0> 1968<06> <03A3> 1969<07> <03D2> 1970<08> <03A6> 1971<0B> <00660066> 1972<0C> <00660069> 1973<0D> <0066006C> 1974<0E> <006600660069> 1975<0F> <00660066006C> 1976<10> <0131> 1977<11> <0237> 1978<12> <0060> 1979<13> <00B4> 1980<14> <02C7> 1981<15> <02D8> 1982<16> <00AF> 1983<17> <02DA> 1984<18> <00B8> 1985<19> <00DF> 1986<1A> <00E6> 1987<1B> <0153> 1988<1C> <00F8> 1989<1D> <00C6> 1990<1E> <0152> 1991<1F> <00D8> 1992<21> <0021> 1993<22> <201D> 1994<27> <2019> 1995<3C> <00A1> 1996<3D> <003D> 1997<3E> <00BF> 1998<5C> <201C> 1999<5F> <02D9> 2000<60> <2018> 2001<7D> <02DD> 2002<7E> <007E> 2003<7F> <00A8> 2004endbfchar 2005endcmap 2006CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 2007end 2008end 2009%%EndResource 2010%%EOF 2011 }\endgroup 2012 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{% 2013 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 2014 }% 2015% 2016% \cmapOT1IT 2017 \begingroup 2018 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 2019 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 2020%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 2021%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 2022%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0) 2023%%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0) 2024%%Version: 1.000 2025%%EndComments 2026/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 202712 dict begin 2028begincmap 2029/CIDSystemInfo 2030<< /Registry (TeX) 2031/Ordering (OT1IT) 2032/Supplement 0 2033>> def 2034/CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def 2035/CMapType 2 def 20361 begincodespacerange 2037<00> <7F> 2038endcodespacerange 20398 beginbfrange 2040<00> <01> <0393> 2041<09> <0A> <03A8> 2042<25> <26> <0025> 2043<28> <3B> <0028> 2044<3F> <5B> <003F> 2045<5D> <5E> <005D> 2046<61> <7A> <0061> 2047<7B> <7C> <2013> 2048endbfrange 204942 beginbfchar 2050<02> <0398> 2051<03> <039B> 2052<04> <039E> 2053<05> <03A0> 2054<06> <03A3> 2055<07> <03D2> 2056<08> <03A6> 2057<0B> <00660066> 2058<0C> <00660069> 2059<0D> <0066006C> 2060<0E> <006600660069> 2061<0F> <00660066006C> 2062<10> <0131> 2063<11> <0237> 2064<12> <0060> 2065<13> <00B4> 2066<14> <02C7> 2067<15> <02D8> 2068<16> <00AF> 2069<17> <02DA> 2070<18> <00B8> 2071<19> <00DF> 2072<1A> <00E6> 2073<1B> <0153> 2074<1C> <00F8> 2075<1D> <00C6> 2076<1E> <0152> 2077<1F> <00D8> 2078<21> <0021> 2079<22> <201D> 2080<23> <0023> 2081<24> <00A3> 2082<27> <2019> 2083<3C> <00A1> 2084<3D> <003D> 2085<3E> <00BF> 2086<5C> <201C> 2087<5F> <02D9> 2088<60> <2018> 2089<7D> <02DD> 2090<7E> <007E> 2091<7F> <00A8> 2092endbfchar 2093endcmap 2094CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 2095end 2096end 2097%%EndResource 2098%%EOF 2099 }\endgroup 2100 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{% 2101 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 2102 }% 2103% 2104% \cmapOT1TT 2105 \begingroup 2106 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 2107 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 2108%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 2109%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 2110%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0) 2111%%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0) 2112%%Version: 1.000 2113%%EndComments 2114/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 211512 dict begin 2116begincmap 2117/CIDSystemInfo 2118<< /Registry (TeX) 2119/Ordering (OT1TT) 2120/Supplement 0 2121>> def 2122/CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def 2123/CMapType 2 def 21241 begincodespacerange 2125<00> <7F> 2126endcodespacerange 21275 beginbfrange 2128<00> <01> <0393> 2129<09> <0A> <03A8> 2130<21> <26> <0021> 2131<28> <5F> <0028> 2132<61> <7E> <0061> 2133endbfrange 213432 beginbfchar 2135<02> <0398> 2136<03> <039B> 2137<04> <039E> 2138<05> <03A0> 2139<06> <03A3> 2140<07> <03D2> 2141<08> <03A6> 2142<0B> <2191> 2143<0C> <2193> 2144<0D> <0027> 2145<0E> <00A1> 2146<0F> <00BF> 2147<10> <0131> 2148<11> <0237> 2149<12> <0060> 2150<13> <00B4> 2151<14> <02C7> 2152<15> <02D8> 2153<16> <00AF> 2154<17> <02DA> 2155<18> <00B8> 2156<19> <00DF> 2157<1A> <00E6> 2158<1B> <0153> 2159<1C> <00F8> 2160<1D> <00C6> 2161<1E> <0152> 2162<1F> <00D8> 2163<20> <2423> 2164<27> <2019> 2165<60> <2018> 2166<7F> <00A8> 2167endbfchar 2168endcmap 2169CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 2170end 2171end 2172%%EndResource 2173%%EOF 2174 }\endgroup 2175 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{% 2176 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 2177 }% 2178\fi\fi 2179 2180 2181% Set the font macro #1 to the font named \fontprefix#2. 2182% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap 2183% encoding (only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, or empty to omit). 2184% Example: 2185% #1 = \textrm 2186% #2 = \rmshape 2187% #3 = 10 2188% #4 = \mainmagstep 2189% #5 = OT1 2190% 2191\def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{% 2192 \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4 2193 \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1% 2194} 2195% This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty. 2196\let\cmap\gobble 2197% 2198% (end of cmaps) 2199 2200% Use cm as the default font prefix. 2201% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix 2202% before you read in texinfo.tex. 2203\ifx\fontprefix\thisisundefined 2204\def\fontprefix{cm} 2205\fi 2206% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM. 2207\def\rmshape{r} 2208\def\rmbshape{bx} % where the normal face is bold 2209\def\bfshape{b} 2210\def\bxshape{bx} 2211\def\ttshape{tt} 2212\def\ttbshape{tt} 2213\def\ttslshape{sltt} 2214\def\itshape{ti} 2215\def\itbshape{bxti} 2216\def\slshape{sl} 2217\def\slbshape{bxsl} 2218\def\sfshape{ss} 2219\def\sfbshape{ss} 2220\def\scshape{csc} 2221\def\scbshape{csc} 2222 2223% Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. (The default in Texinfo.) 2224% 2225\def\definetextfontsizexi{% 2226% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1). 2227\def\textnominalsize{11pt} 2228\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf} 2229\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2230\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2231\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2232\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} 2233\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2234\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2235\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2236\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2237\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep 2238\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep 2239\def\textecsize{1095} 2240 2241% A few fonts for @defun names and args. 2242\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2243\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2244\setfont\defsl\slshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2245\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2246\def\df{\let\ttfont=\deftt \let\bffont = \defbf 2247\let\ttslfont=\defttsl \let\slfont=\defsl \bf} 2248 2249% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). 2250\def\smallnominalsize{9pt} 2251\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2252\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2253\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2254\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2255\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2256\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2257\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2258\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2259\font\smalli=cmmi9 2260\font\smallsy=cmsy9 2261\def\smallecsize{0900} 2262 2263% Fonts for small examples (8pt). 2264\def\smallernominalsize{8pt} 2265\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2266\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} 2267\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2268\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} 2269\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2270\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2271\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2272\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} 2273\font\smalleri=cmmi8 2274\font\smallersy=cmsy8 2275\def\smallerecsize{0800} 2276 2277% Fonts for math mode superscripts (7pt). 2278\def\sevennominalsize{7pt} 2279\setfont\sevenrm\rmshape{7}{1000}{OT1} 2280\setfont\seventt\ttshape{10}{700}{OT1TT} 2281\setfont\sevenbf\bfshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2282\setfont\sevenit\itshape{7}{1000}{OT1IT} 2283\setfont\sevensl\slshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2284\setfont\sevensf\sfshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2285\setfont\sevensc\scshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2286\setfont\seventtsl\ttslshape{10}{700}{OT1TT} 2287\font\seveni=cmmi7 2288\font\sevensy=cmsy7 2289\def\sevenecsize{0700} 2290 2291% Fonts for title page (20.4pt): 2292\def\titlenominalsize{20pt} 2293\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2294\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} 2295\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2296\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2297\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} 2298\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2299\let\titlebf=\titlerm 2300\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2301\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 2302\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 2303\def\titleecsize{2074} 2304 2305% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt). 2306\def\chapnominalsize{17pt} 2307\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2308\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT} 2309\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2310\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2311\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2312\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1} 2313\let\chapbf=\chaprm 2314\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2315\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 2316\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3 2317\def\chapecsize{1728} 2318 2319% Section fonts (14.4pt). 2320\def\secnominalsize{14pt} 2321\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2322\setfont\secrmnotbold\rmshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2323\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} 2324\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2325\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2326\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2327\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2328\let\secbf\secrm 2329\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2330\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 2331\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 2332\def\sececsize{1440} 2333 2334% Subsection fonts (13.15pt). 2335\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt} 2336\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2337\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT} 2338\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} 2339\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2340\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT} 2341\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2342\let\ssecbf\ssecrm 2343\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} 2344\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf 2345\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315 2346\def\ssececsize{1200} 2347 2348% Reduced fonts for @acronym in text (10pt). 2349\def\reducednominalsize{10pt} 2350\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2351\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2352\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2353\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} 2354\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2355\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2356\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2357\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2358\font\reducedi=cmmi10 2359\font\reducedsy=cmsy10 2360\def\reducedecsize{1000} 2361 2362\textleading = 13.2pt % line spacing for 11pt CM 2363\textfonts % reset the current fonts 2364\rm 2365} % end of 11pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizexi 2366 2367 2368% Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with 2369% section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU 2370% Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the 2371% future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt. 2372% 2373\def\definetextfontsizex{% 2374% Text fonts (10pt). 2375\def\textnominalsize{10pt} 2376\edef\mainmagstep{1000} 2377\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2378\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2379\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2380\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} 2381\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2382\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2383\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2384\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2385\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep 2386\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep 2387\def\textecsize{1000} 2388 2389% A few fonts for @defun names and args. 2390\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2391\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2392\setfont\defsl\slshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2393\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2394\def\df{\let\ttfont=\deftt \let\bffont = \defbf 2395\let\slfont=\defsl \let\ttslfont=\defttsl \bf} 2396 2397% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). 2398\def\smallnominalsize{9pt} 2399\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2400\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2401\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2402\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2403\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2404\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2405\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2406\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2407\font\smalli=cmmi9 2408\font\smallsy=cmsy9 2409\def\smallecsize{0900} 2410 2411% Fonts for small examples (8pt). 2412\def\smallernominalsize{8pt} 2413\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2414\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} 2415\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2416\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} 2417\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2418\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2419\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2420\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} 2421\font\smalleri=cmmi8 2422\font\smallersy=cmsy8 2423\def\smallerecsize{0800} 2424 2425% Fonts for math mode superscripts (7pt). 2426\def\sevennominalsize{7pt} 2427\setfont\sevenrm\rmshape{7}{1000}{OT1} 2428\setfont\seventt\ttshape{10}{700}{OT1TT} 2429\setfont\sevenbf\bfshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2430\setfont\sevenit\itshape{7}{1000}{OT1IT} 2431\setfont\sevensl\slshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2432\setfont\sevensf\sfshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2433\setfont\sevensc\scshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2434\setfont\seventtsl\ttslshape{10}{700}{OT1TT} 2435\font\seveni=cmmi7 2436\font\sevensy=cmsy7 2437\def\sevenecsize{0700} 2438 2439% Fonts for title page (20.4pt): 2440\def\titlenominalsize{20pt} 2441\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2442\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} 2443\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2444\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2445\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} 2446\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2447\let\titlebf=\titlerm 2448\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2449\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 2450\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 2451\def\titleecsize{2074} 2452 2453% Chapter fonts (14.4pt). 2454\def\chapnominalsize{14pt} 2455\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2456\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} 2457\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2458\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2459\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2460\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2461\let\chapbf\chaprm 2462\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2463\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 2464\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 2465\def\chapecsize{1440} 2466 2467% Section fonts (12pt). 2468\def\secnominalsize{12pt} 2469\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2470\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT} 2471\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2472\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} 2473\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2474\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2475\let\secbf\secrm 2476\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2477\font\seci=cmmi12 2478\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1 2479\def\sececsize{1200} 2480 2481% Subsection fonts (10pt). 2482\def\ssecnominalsize{10pt} 2483\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2484\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} 2485\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2486\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2487\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2488\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2489\let\ssecbf\ssecrm 2490\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2491\font\sseci=cmmi10 2492\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 2493\def\ssececsize{1000} 2494 2495% Reduced fonts for @acronym in text (9pt). 2496\def\reducednominalsize{9pt} 2497\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2498\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2499\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2500\setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2501\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2502\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2503\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2504\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2505\font\reducedi=cmmi9 2506\font\reducedsy=cmsy9 2507\def\reducedecsize{0900} 2508 2509\divide\parskip by 2 % reduce space between paragraphs 2510\textleading = 12pt % line spacing for 10pt CM 2511\textfonts % reset the current fonts 2512\rm 2513} % end of 10pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizex 2514 2515% Fonts for short table of contents. 2516\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2517\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12 2518\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2519\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} 2520 2521 2522% We provide the user-level command 2523% @fonttextsize 10 2524% (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed. 2525% 2526\def\xiword{11} 2527\def\xword{10} 2528\def\xwordpt{10pt} 2529% 2530\parseargdef\fonttextsize{% 2531 \def\textsizearg{#1}% 2532 %\wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}% 2533 % 2534 % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since 2535 % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless. 2536 % 2537 \begingroup \globaldefs=1 2538 \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex 2539 \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi 2540 \else 2541 \errhelp=\EMsimple 2542 \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'} 2543 \fi\fi 2544 \endgroup 2545} 2546 2547% 2548% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle. 2549% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in 2550% italics, not bold italics. 2551% 2552\def\setfontstyle#1{% 2553 \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd. 2554 \csname #1font\endcsname % change the current font 2555} 2556 2557\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}} 2558\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}} 2559\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}} 2560\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf} 2561\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}\def\ttstylename{tt} 2562 2563% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. 2564% So we set up a \sf. 2565\newfam\sffam 2566\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}} 2567 2568% We don't need math for this font style. 2569\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}} 2570 2571 2572% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, 2573% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. 2574% We don't bother to reset \scriptscriptfont; awaiting user need. 2575% 2576\def\resetmathfonts{% 2577 \textfont0=\rmfont \textfont1=\ifont \textfont2=\syfont 2578 \textfont\itfam=\itfont \textfont\slfam=\slfont \textfont\bffam=\bffont 2579 \textfont\ttfam=\ttfont \textfont\sffam=\sffont 2580 % 2581 % Fonts for superscript. Note that the 7pt fonts are used regardless 2582 % of the current font size. 2583 \scriptfont0=\sevenrm \scriptfont1=\seveni \scriptfont2=\sevensy 2584 \scriptfont\itfam=\sevenit \scriptfont\slfam=\sevensl 2585 \scriptfont\bffam=\sevenbf \scriptfont\ttfam=\seventt 2586 \scriptfont\sffam=\sevensf 2587} 2588 2589% 2590 2591% The font-changing commands (all called \...fonts) redefine the meanings 2592% of \STYLEfont, instead of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs 2593% to also set the current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) 2594% commands hardwire \STYLEfont to set the current font. 2595% 2596% The fonts used for \ifont are for "math italics" (\itfont is for italics 2597% in regular text). \syfont is also used in math mode only. 2598% 2599% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower) 2600% and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used 2601% in, e.g., the LaTeX logo and acronyms. 2602% 2603% This all needs generalizing, badly. 2604% 2605 2606\def\assignfonts#1{% 2607 \expandafter\let\expandafter\rmfont\csname #1rm\endcsname 2608 \expandafter\let\expandafter\itfont\csname #1it\endcsname 2609 \expandafter\let\expandafter\slfont\csname #1sl\endcsname 2610 \expandafter\let\expandafter\bffont\csname #1bf\endcsname 2611 \expandafter\let\expandafter\ttfont\csname #1tt\endcsname 2612 \expandafter\let\expandafter\smallcaps\csname #1sc\endcsname 2613 \expandafter\let\expandafter\sffont \csname #1sf\endcsname 2614 \expandafter\let\expandafter\ifont \csname #1i\endcsname 2615 \expandafter\let\expandafter\syfont \csname #1sy\endcsname 2616 \expandafter\let\expandafter\ttslfont\csname #1ttsl\endcsname 2617} 2618 2619\newif\ifrmisbold 2620 2621% Select smaller font size with the current style. Used to change font size 2622% in, e.g., the LaTeX logo and acronyms. If we are using bold fonts for 2623% normal roman text, also use bold fonts for roman text in the smaller size. 2624\def\switchtolllsize{% 2625 \expandafter\assignfonts\expandafter{\lllsize}% 2626 \ifrmisbold 2627 \let\rmfont\bffont 2628 \fi 2629 \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname 2630}% 2631 2632\def\switchtolsize{% 2633 \expandafter\assignfonts\expandafter{\lsize}% 2634 \ifrmisbold 2635 \let\rmfont\bffont 2636 \fi 2637 \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname 2638}% 2639 2640\def\definefontsetatsize#1#2#3#4#5{% 2641\expandafter\def\csname #1fonts\endcsname{% 2642 \def\curfontsize{#1}% 2643 \def\lsize{#2}\def\lllsize{#3}% 2644 \csname rmisbold#5\endcsname 2645 \assignfonts{#1}% 2646 \resetmathfonts 2647 \setleading{#4}% 2648}} 2649 2650\definefontsetatsize{text} {reduced}{smaller}{\textleading}{false} 2651\definefontsetatsize{title} {chap} {subsec} {27pt} {true} 2652\definefontsetatsize{chap} {sec} {text} {19pt} {true} 2653\definefontsetatsize{sec} {subsec} {reduced}{17pt} {true} 2654\definefontsetatsize{ssec} {text} {small} {15pt} {true} 2655\definefontsetatsize{reduced}{small} {smaller}{10.5pt}{false} 2656\definefontsetatsize{small} {smaller}{smaller}{10.5pt}{false} 2657\definefontsetatsize{smaller}{smaller}{smaller}{9.5pt} {false} 2658 2659\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}} 2660\let\subsecfonts = \ssecfonts 2661\let\subsubsecfonts = \ssecfonts 2662 2663% Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts. 2664\def\angleleft{$\langle$} 2665\def\angleright{$\rangle$} 2666 2667% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments. 2668\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts 2669 2670% About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample 2671% can fit this many characters: 2672% 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69 2673% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters: 2674% 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77 2675% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth 2676% the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt. 2677% 2678% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt): 2679% 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58 2680% --karl, 24jan03. 2681 2682% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. 2683% 2684\definetextfontsizexi 2685 2686 2687% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the 2688% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and 2689% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have 2690% this property, we can check that font parameter. 2691% 2692\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt } 2693 2694{ 2695\catcode`\'=\active 2696\catcode`\`=\active 2697 2698\gdef\setcodequotes{\let`\codequoteleft \let'\codequoteright} 2699\gdef\setregularquotes{\let`\lq \let'\rq} 2700} 2701 2702% Allow an option to not use regular directed right quote/apostrophe 2703% (char 0x27), but instead the undirected quote from cmtt (char 0x0d). 2704% The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it the default, but it 2705% works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least evince), the 2706% lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the regular 0x27. 2707% 2708\def\codequoteright{% 2709 \ifmonospace 2710 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax 2711 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax 2712 '% 2713 \else \char'15 \fi 2714 \else \char'15 \fi 2715 \else 2716 '% 2717 \fi 2718} 2719% 2720% and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent. 2721% Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like 2722% the code environments to do likewise. 2723% 2724\def\codequoteleft{% 2725 \ifmonospace 2726 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax 2727 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax 2728 % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391 2729 % \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. 2730 \relax`% 2731 \else \char'22 \fi 2732 \else \char'22 \fi 2733 \else 2734 \relax`% 2735 \fi 2736} 2737 2738% Commands to set the quote options. 2739% 2740\parseargdef\codequoteundirected{% 2741 \def\temp{#1}% 2742 \ifx\temp\onword 2743 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname 2744 = t% 2745 \else\ifx\temp\offword 2746 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname 2747 = \relax 2748 \else 2749 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2750 \errmessage{Unknown @codequoteundirected value `\temp', must be on|off}% 2751 \fi\fi 2752} 2753% 2754\parseargdef\codequotebacktick{% 2755 \def\temp{#1}% 2756 \ifx\temp\onword 2757 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname 2758 = t% 2759 \else\ifx\temp\offword 2760 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname 2761 = \relax 2762 \else 2763 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2764 \errmessage{Unknown @codequotebacktick value `\temp', must be on|off}% 2765 \fi\fi 2766} 2767 2768% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. 2769\def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq} 2770 2771% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks 2772\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 2773 2774% Font commands. 2775 2776% #1 is the font command (\sl or \it), #2 is the text to slant. 2777% If we are in a monospaced environment, however, 1) always use \ttsl, 2778% and 2) do not add an italic correction. 2779\def\dosmartslant#1#2{% 2780 \ifusingtt 2781 {{\ttsl #2}\let\next=\relax}% 2782 {\def\next{{#1#2}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}}% 2783 \next 2784} 2785\def\smartslanted{\dosmartslant\sl} 2786\def\smartitalic{\dosmartslant\it} 2787 2788% Output an italic correction unless \next (presumed to be the following 2789% character) is such as not to need one. 2790\def\smartitaliccorrection{% 2791 \ifx\next,% 2792 \else\ifx\next-% 2793 \else\ifx\next.% 2794 \else\ifx\next\.% 2795 \else\ifx\next\comma% 2796 \else\ptexslash 2797 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 2798 \aftersmartic 2799} 2800 2801% Unconditional use \ttsl, and no ic. @var is set to this for defuns. 2802\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}} 2803 2804% @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want 2805% ttsl for book titles, do we? 2806\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection} 2807 2808\def\aftersmartic{} 2809\def\var#1{% 2810 \let\saveaftersmartic = \aftersmartic 2811 \def\aftersmartic{\null\let\aftersmartic=\saveaftersmartic}% 2812 \smartslanted{#1}% 2813} 2814 2815\let\i=\smartitalic 2816\let\slanted=\smartslanted 2817\let\dfn=\smartslanted 2818\let\emph=\smartitalic 2819 2820% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii. 2821\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font 2822\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font 2823\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font 2824 2825% @b, explicit bold. Also @strong. 2826\def\b#1{{\bf #1}} 2827\let\strong=\b 2828 2829% @sansserif, explicit sans. 2830\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}} 2831 2832% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at 2833% the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the 2834% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called. 2835% 2836\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation} 2837\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- } 2838 2839% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value. 2840% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and 2841% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up. 2842% 2843\catcode`@=11 2844 \def\plainfrenchspacing{% 2845 \sfcode`\.=\@m \sfcode`\?=\@m \sfcode`\!=\@m 2846 \sfcode`\:=\@m \sfcode`\;=\@m \sfcode`\,=\@m 2847 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends 2848 } 2849 \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{% 2850 \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000 2851 \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250 2852 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends 2853 } 2854\catcode`@=\other 2855\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default 2856 2857% @t, explicit typewriter. 2858\def\t#1{% 2859 {\tt \plainfrenchspacing #1}% 2860 \null 2861} 2862 2863% @samp. 2864\def\samp#1{{\setcodequotes\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}} 2865 2866% @indicateurl is \samp, that is, with quotes. 2867\let\indicateurl=\samp 2868 2869% @code (and similar) prints in typewriter, but with spaces the same 2870% size as normal in the surrounding text, without hyphenation, etc. 2871% This is a subroutine for that. 2872\def\tclose#1{% 2873 {% 2874 % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font. 2875 \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font 2876 % 2877 % Switch to typewriter. 2878 \tt 2879 % 2880 % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space. 2881 \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}% 2882 % 2883 % Turn off hyphenation. 2884 \nohyphenation 2885 % 2886 \plainfrenchspacing 2887 #1% 2888 }% 2889 \null % reset spacefactor to 1000 2890} 2891 2892% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code. 2893% (But see \codedashfinish below.) 2894% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes 2895% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc. 2896% 2897% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control 2898% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words. 2899% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that) 2900% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. -- rms. 2901{ 2902 \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active 2903 \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active 2904 \global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq % default definitions 2905 % 2906 \global\def\code{\begingroup 2907 \setcodequotes 2908 \catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active 2909 \ifallowcodebreaks 2910 \let-\codedash 2911 \let_\codeunder 2912 \else 2913 \let-\normaldash 2914 \let_\realunder 2915 \fi 2916 % Given -foo (with a single dash), we do not want to allow a break 2917 % after the hyphen. 2918 \global\let\codedashprev=\codedash 2919 % 2920 \codex 2921 } 2922 % 2923 \gdef\codedash{\futurelet\next\codedashfinish} 2924 \gdef\codedashfinish{% 2925 \normaldash % always output the dash character itself. 2926 % 2927 % Now, output a discretionary to allow a line break, unless 2928 % (a) the next character is a -, or 2929 % (b) the preceding character is a -. 2930 % E.g., given --posix, we do not want to allow a break after either -. 2931 % Given --foo-bar, we do want to allow a break between the - and the b. 2932 \ifx\next\codedash \else 2933 \ifx\codedashprev\codedash 2934 \else \discretionary{}{}{}\fi 2935 \fi 2936 % we need the space after the = for the case when \next itself is a 2937 % space token; it would get swallowed otherwise. As in @code{- a}. 2938 \global\let\codedashprev= \next 2939 } 2940} 2941\def\normaldash{-} 2942% 2943\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} 2944 2945\def\codeunder{% 2946 % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _ 2947 % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.) 2948 % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us 2949 % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop. 2950 \ifusingtt{\ifmmode 2951 \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_. 2952 \else\normalunderscore \fi 2953 \discretionary{}{}{}}% 2954 {\_}% 2955} 2956 2957% An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g., 2958% each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is bad. 2959% @allowcodebreaks provides a document-level way to turn breaking at - 2960% and _ on and off. 2961% 2962\newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue 2963 2964\def\keywordtrue{true} 2965\def\keywordfalse{false} 2966 2967\parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{% 2968 \def\txiarg{#1}% 2969 \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue 2970 \allowcodebreakstrue 2971 \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse 2972 \allowcodebreaksfalse 2973 \else 2974 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2975 \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg', must be true|false}% 2976 \fi\fi 2977} 2978 2979% For @command, @env, @file, @option quotes seem unnecessary, 2980% so use \code rather than \samp. 2981\let\command=\code 2982\let\env=\code 2983\let\file=\code 2984\let\option=\code 2985 2986% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') aka @url takes an optional 2987% (comma-separated) second argument specifying the text to display and 2988% an optional third arg as text to display instead of (rather than in 2989% addition to) the url itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. 2990 2991% TeX-only option to allow changing PDF output to show only the second 2992% arg (if given), and not the url (which is then just the link target). 2993\newif\ifurefurlonlylink 2994 2995% The default \pretolerance setting stops the penalty inserted in 2996% \urefallowbreak being a discouragement to line breaking. Set it to 2997% a negative value for this paragraph only. Hopefully this does not 2998% conflict with redefinitions of \par done elsewhere. 2999\def\nopretolerance{% 3000\pretolerance=-1 3001\def\par{\endgraf\pretolerance=100 \let\par\endgraf}% 3002} 3003 3004% The main macro is \urefbreak, which allows breaking at expected 3005% places within the url. 3006\def\urefbreak{\nopretolerance \begingroup \urefcatcodes \dourefbreak} 3007\let\uref=\urefbreak 3008% 3009\def\dourefbreak#1{\urefbreakfinish #1,,,\finish} 3010\def\urefbreakfinish#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% doesn't work in @example 3011 \unsepspaces 3012 \pdfurl{#1}% 3013 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 3014 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 3015 \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that 3016 \else 3017 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% look for second arg 3018 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 3019 \ifpdf 3020 % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX 3021 \ifurefurlonlylink 3022 % PDF plus option to not display url, show just arg 3023 \unhbox0 3024 \else 3025 % PDF, normally display both arg and url for consistency, 3026 % visibility, if the pdf is eventually used to print, etc. 3027 \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% 3028 \fi 3029 \else 3030 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 3031 \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% DVI, always show arg and url 3032 \else 3033 % For XeTeX 3034 \ifurefurlonlylink 3035 % PDF plus option to not display url, show just arg 3036 \unhbox0 3037 \else 3038 % PDF, normally display both arg and url for consistency, 3039 % visibility, if the pdf is eventually used to print, etc. 3040 \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% 3041 \fi 3042 \fi 3043 \fi 3044 \else 3045 \urefcode{#1}% only url given, so show it 3046 \fi 3047 \fi 3048 \endlink 3049\endgroup} 3050 3051% Allow line breaks around only a few characters (only). 3052\def\urefcatcodes{% 3053 \catcode`\&=\active \catcode`\.=\active 3054 \catcode`\#=\active \catcode`\?=\active 3055 \catcode`\/=\active 3056} 3057{ 3058 \urefcatcodes 3059 % 3060 \global\def\urefcode{\begingroup 3061 \setcodequotes 3062 \urefcatcodes 3063 \let&\urefcodeamp 3064 \let.\urefcodedot 3065 \let#\urefcodehash 3066 \let?\urefcodequest 3067 \let/\urefcodeslash 3068 \codex 3069 } 3070 % 3071 % By default, they are just regular characters. 3072 \global\def&{\normalamp} 3073 \global\def.{\normaldot} 3074 \global\def#{\normalhash} 3075 \global\def?{\normalquest} 3076 \global\def/{\normalslash} 3077} 3078 3079\def\urefcodeamp{\urefprebreak \&\urefpostbreak} 3080\def\urefcodedot{\urefprebreak .\urefpostbreak} 3081\def\urefcodehash{\urefprebreak \#\urefpostbreak} 3082\def\urefcodequest{\urefprebreak ?\urefpostbreak} 3083\def\urefcodeslash{\futurelet\next\urefcodeslashfinish} 3084{ 3085 \catcode`\/=\active 3086 \global\def\urefcodeslashfinish{% 3087 \urefprebreak \slashChar 3088 % Allow line break only after the final / in a sequence of 3089 % slashes, to avoid line break between the slashes in http://. 3090 \ifx\next/\else \urefpostbreak \fi 3091 } 3092} 3093 3094% By default we'll break after the special characters, but some people like to 3095% break before the special chars, so allow that. Also allow no breaking at 3096% all, for manual control. 3097% 3098\parseargdef\urefbreakstyle{% 3099 \def\txiarg{#1}% 3100 \ifx\txiarg\wordnone 3101 \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak} 3102 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordbefore 3103 \def\urefprebreak{\urefallowbreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak} 3104 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordafter 3105 \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\urefallowbreak} 3106 \else 3107 \errhelp = \EMsimple 3108 \errmessage{Unknown @urefbreakstyle setting `\txiarg'}% 3109 \fi\fi\fi 3110} 3111\def\wordafter{after} 3112\def\wordbefore{before} 3113\def\wordnone{none} 3114 3115% Allow a ragged right output to aid breaking long URL's. There can 3116% be a break at the \allowbreak with no extra glue (if the existing stretch in 3117% the line is sufficient), a break at the \penalty with extra glue added 3118% at the end of the line, or no break at all here. 3119% Changing the value of the penalty and/or the amount of stretch affects how 3120% preferable one choice is over the other. 3121\def\urefallowbreak{% 3122 \penalty0\relax 3123 \hskip 0pt plus 2 em\relax 3124 \penalty1000\relax 3125 \hskip 0pt plus -2 em\relax 3126} 3127 3128\urefbreakstyle after 3129 3130% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it. 3131% 3132\let\url=\uref 3133 3134% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97. 3135% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf. 3136% 3137%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright} 3138\ifpdforxetex 3139 \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} 3140 \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup 3141 \unsepspaces 3142 \pdfurl{mailto:#1}% 3143 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 3144 \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi 3145 \endlink 3146 \endgroup} 3147\else 3148 \let\email=\uref 3149\fi 3150 3151% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always), 3152% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends), 3153% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always). 3154\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{% 3155 \def\txiarg{#1}% 3156 \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct 3157 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}% 3158 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample 3159 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% 3160 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode 3161 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% 3162 \else 3163 \errhelp = \EMsimple 3164 \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle setting `\txiarg'}% 3165 \fi\fi\fi 3166} 3167\def\worddistinct{distinct} 3168\def\wordexample{example} 3169\def\wordcode{code} 3170 3171% Default is `distinct'. 3172\kbdinputstyle distinct 3173 3174% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, 3175% then @kbd has no effect. 3176\def\kbd#1{{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdsub\look??\par}} 3177 3178\def\xkey{\key} 3179\def\kbdsub#1#2#3\par{% 3180 \def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% 3181 \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% 3182 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setcodequotes\look}}\fi 3183 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setcodequotes\look}}\fi 3184} 3185 3186% definition of @key that produces a lozenge. Doesn't adjust to text size. 3187%\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 3188%\font\keysy=cmsy9 3189%\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{% 3190% \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{% 3191% \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt 3192% \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}% 3193% \kern-0.4pt\hrule}% 3194% \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}} 3195 3196% definition of @key with no lozenge. If the current font is already 3197% monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle. But 3198% if it isn't monospace, then use \tt. 3199% 3200\def\key#1{{\setregularquotes 3201 \nohyphenation 3202 \ifmonospace\else\tt\fi 3203 #1}\null} 3204 3205% @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...} 3206\def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup} 3207 3208% @clickstyle @arrow (by default) 3209\parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}} 3210\def\click{\arrow} 3211 3212% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the 3213% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt. 3214% 3215\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} 3216 3217% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like. 3218% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for 3219% all-uppercase. 3220% 3221\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish} 3222\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{% 3223 {\switchtolsize #1}% 3224 \def\temp{#2}% 3225 \ifx\temp\empty \else 3226 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% 3227 \fi 3228 \null % reset \spacefactor=1000 3229} 3230 3231% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like. 3232% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing. 3233% 3234\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish} 3235\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{% 3236 {\plainfrenchspacing #1}% 3237 \def\temp{#2}% 3238 \ifx\temp\empty \else 3239 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% 3240 \fi 3241 \null % reset \spacefactor=1000 3242} 3243 3244% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example. 3245% 3246\def\asis#1{#1} 3247 3248% @math outputs its argument in math mode. 3249% 3250% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean 3251% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make 3252% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam, 3253% which is what @var uses. 3254{ 3255 \catcode`\_ = \active 3256 \gdef\mathunderscore{% 3257 \catcode`\_=\active 3258 \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}% 3259 } 3260} 3261% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a math (or tt) \. 3262% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (for no 3263% particular reason), but this is not advertised and we don't care. 3264% 3265% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\. 3266\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi} 3267% 3268\def\math{% 3269 \ifmmode\else % only go into math if not in math mode already 3270 \tex 3271 \mathunderscore 3272 \let\\ = \mathbackslash 3273 \mathactive 3274 % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode 3275 \let\"=\ddot 3276 \let\'=\acute 3277 \let\==\bar 3278 \let\^=\hat 3279 \let\`=\grave 3280 \let\u=\breve 3281 \let\v=\check 3282 \let\~=\tilde 3283 \let\dotaccent=\dot 3284 % have to provide another name for sup operator 3285 \let\mathopsup=\sup 3286 $\expandafter\finishmath\fi 3287} 3288\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex. 3289 3290% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math. 3291% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument 3292% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section). 3293% 3294{ 3295 \catcode`^ = \active 3296 \catcode`< = \active 3297 \catcode`> = \active 3298 \catcode`+ = \active 3299 \catcode`' = \active 3300 \gdef\mathactive{% 3301 \let^ = \ptexhat 3302 \let< = \ptexless 3303 \let> = \ptexgtr 3304 \let+ = \ptexplus 3305 \let' = \ptexquoteright 3306 } 3307} 3308 3309% for @sub and @sup, if in math mode, just do a normal sub/superscript. 3310% If in text, use math to place as sub/superscript, but switch 3311% into text mode, with smaller fonts. This is a different font than the 3312% one used for real math sub/superscripts (8pt vs. 7pt), but let's not 3313% fix it (significant additions to font machinery) until someone notices. 3314% 3315\def\sub{\ifmmode \expandafter\sb \else \expandafter\finishsub\fi} 3316\def\finishsub#1{$\sb{\hbox{\switchtolllsize #1}}$}% 3317% 3318\def\sup{\ifmmode \expandafter\ptexsp \else \expandafter\finishsup\fi} 3319\def\finishsup#1{$\ptexsp{\hbox{\switchtolllsize #1}}$}% 3320 3321% provide this command from LaTeX as it is very common 3322\def\frac#1#2{{{#1}\over{#2}}} 3323 3324% @displaymath. 3325% \globaldefs is needed to recognize the end lines in \tex and 3326% \end tex. Set \thisenv as @end displaymath is seen before @end tex. 3327{\obeylines 3328\globaldefs=1 3329\envdef\displaymath{% 3330\tex% 3331\def\thisenv{\displaymath}% 3332\begingroup\let\end\displaymathend% 3333$$% 3334} 3335 3336\def\displaymathend{$$\endgroup\end}% 3337 3338\def\Edisplaymath{% 3339\def\thisenv{\tex}% 3340\end tex 3341}} 3342 3343 3344% @inlinefmt{FMTNAME,PROCESSED-TEXT} and @inlineraw{FMTNAME,RAW-TEXT}. 3345% Ignore unless FMTNAME == tex; then it is like @iftex and @tex, 3346% except specified as a normal braced arg, so no newlines to worry about. 3347% 3348\def\outfmtnametex{tex} 3349% 3350\long\def\inlinefmt#1{\doinlinefmt #1,\finish} 3351\long\def\doinlinefmt#1,#2,\finish{% 3352 \def\inlinefmtname{#1}% 3353 \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi 3354} 3355% 3356% @inlinefmtifelse{FMTNAME,THEN-TEXT,ELSE-TEXT} expands THEN-TEXT if 3357% FMTNAME is tex, else ELSE-TEXT. 3358\long\def\inlinefmtifelse#1{\doinlinefmtifelse #1,,,\finish} 3359\long\def\doinlinefmtifelse#1,#2,#3,#4,\finish{% 3360 \def\inlinefmtname{#1}% 3361 \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\else \ignorespaces #3\fi 3362} 3363% 3364% For raw, must switch into @tex before parsing the argument, to avoid 3365% setting catcodes prematurely. Doing it this way means that, for 3366% example, @inlineraw{html, foo{bar} gets a parse error instead of being 3367% ignored. But this isn't important because if people want a literal 3368% *right* brace they would have to use a command anyway, so they may as 3369% well use a command to get a left brace too. We could re-use the 3370% delimiter character idea from \verb, but it seems like overkill. 3371% 3372\long\def\inlineraw{\tex \doinlineraw} 3373\long\def\doinlineraw#1{\doinlinerawtwo #1,\finish} 3374\def\doinlinerawtwo#1,#2,\finish{% 3375 \def\inlinerawname{#1}% 3376 \ifx\inlinerawname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi 3377 \endgroup % close group opened by \tex. 3378} 3379 3380% @inlineifset{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is @set. 3381% 3382\long\def\inlineifset#1{\doinlineifset #1,\finish} 3383\long\def\doinlineifset#1,#2,\finish{% 3384 \def\inlinevarname{#1}% 3385 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax 3386 \else\ignorespaces#2\fi 3387} 3388 3389% @inlineifclear{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is not @set. 3390% 3391\long\def\inlineifclear#1{\doinlineifclear #1,\finish} 3392\long\def\doinlineifclear#1,#2,\finish{% 3393 \def\inlinevarname{#1}% 3394 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax \ignorespaces#2\fi 3395} 3396 3397 3398\message{glyphs,} 3399% and logos. 3400 3401% @@ prints an @, as does @atchar{}. 3402\def\@{\char64 } 3403\let\atchar=\@ 3404 3405% @{ @} @lbracechar{} @rbracechar{} all generate brace characters. 3406\def\lbracechar{{\ifmonospace\char123\else\ensuremath\lbrace\fi}} 3407\def\rbracechar{{\ifmonospace\char125\else\ensuremath\rbrace\fi}} 3408\let\{=\lbracechar 3409\let\}=\rbracechar 3410 3411% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems. 3412\let\comma = , 3413 3414% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent 3415% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H. 3416\let\, = \ptexc 3417\let\dotaccent = \ptexdot 3418\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}} 3419\let\tieaccent = \ptext 3420\let\ubaraccent = \ptexb 3421\let\udotaccent = \d 3422 3423% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm 3424% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss. 3425\def\questiondown{?`} 3426\def\exclamdown{!`} 3427\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize \underbar{a}}} 3428\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize \underbar{o}}} 3429 3430% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents. 3431\def\imacro{i} 3432\def\jmacro{j} 3433\def\dotless#1{% 3434 \def\temp{#1}% 3435 \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi 3436 \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi 3437 \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}% 3438 \fi\fi 3439} 3440 3441% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a 3442% period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.) 3443% 3444\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 } 3445 3446% @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in 3447% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most 3448% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using 3449% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and 3450% \scriptscriptstyle). 3451% 3452\def\LaTeX{% 3453 L\kern-.36em 3454 {\setbox0=\hbox{T}% 3455 \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{% 3456 \ifx\textnominalsize\xwordpt 3457 % for 10pt running text, lllsize (8pt) is too small for the A in LaTeX. 3458 % Revert to plain's \scriptsize, which is 7pt. 3459 \count255=\the\fam $\fam\count255 \scriptstyle A$% 3460 \else 3461 % For 11pt, we can use our lllsize. 3462 \switchtolllsize A% 3463 \fi 3464 }% 3465 \vss 3466 }}% 3467 \kern-.15em 3468 \TeX 3469} 3470 3471% Some math mode symbols. Define \ensuremath to switch into math mode 3472% unless we are already there. Expansion tricks may not be needed here, 3473% but safer, and can't hurt. 3474\def\ensuremath{\ifmmode \expandafter\asis \else\expandafter\ensuredmath \fi} 3475\def\ensuredmath#1{$\relax#1$} 3476% 3477\def\bullet{\ensuremath\ptexbullet} 3478\def\geq{\ensuremath\ge} 3479\def\leq{\ensuremath\le} 3480\def\minus{\ensuremath-} 3481 3482% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font. 3483% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm 3484% typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand, 3485% in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do 3486% whichever is larger. 3487% 3488\def\dots{% 3489 \leavevmode 3490 \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods 3491 \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em 3492 \dimen0 = \wd0 3493 \else 3494 \dimen0 = 1.5em 3495 \fi 3496 \hbox to \dimen0{% 3497 \hskip 0pt plus.25fil 3498 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil 3499 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil 3500 .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil 3501 }% 3502} 3503 3504% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. 3505% 3506\def\enddots{% 3507 \dots 3508 \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor 3509} 3510 3511% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}. 3512% 3513% Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of 3514% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em. 3515% 3516\def\point{$\star$} 3517\def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}} 3518\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} 3519\def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} 3520\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} 3521\def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} 3522 3523% The @error{} command. 3524% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit. 3525% 3526\newbox\errorbox 3527% 3528{\ttfont \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box. 3529\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules 3530% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.) 3531\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf \putworderror\kern-1.5pt} 3532% 3533\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil 3534 \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right. 3535 \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules. 3536 \vbox{% 3537 \hrule height\dimen2 3538 \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text. 3539 \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below. 3540 \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right. 3541 \hrule height\dimen2} 3542 \hfil} 3543% 3544\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox} 3545 3546% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font. 3547% 3548\def\pounds{\ifmonospace{\ecfont\char"BF}\else{\it\$}\fi} 3549 3550% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style. 3551% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik 3552% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and 3553% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need). 3554% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym. 3555% 3556% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore 3557% that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular 3558% font height. 3559% 3560% feymr - regular 3561% feymo - slanted 3562% feybr - bold 3563% feybo - bold slanted 3564% 3565% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge. 3566% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide. 3567% Hmm. 3568% 3569% Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols? 3570% Hope not. 3571% 3572% 3573\def\euro{{\eurofont e}} 3574\def\eurofont{% 3575 % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in 3576 % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that 3577 % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the 3578 % font installed. 3579 % 3580 % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale 3581 % that to the current nominal size. 3582 % 3583 % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but 3584 % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts. 3585 % 3586 \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% 3587 % 3588 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 3589 % bold: 3590 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize 3591 \else 3592 % regular: 3593 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize 3594 \fi 3595 \thiseurofont 3596} 3597 3598% Glyphs from the EC fonts. We don't use \let for the aliases, because 3599% sometimes we redefine the original macro, and the alias should reflect 3600% the redefinition. 3601% 3602% Use LaTeX names for the Icelandic letters. 3603\def\DH{{\ecfont \char"D0}} % Eth 3604\def\dh{{\ecfont \char"F0}} % eth 3605\def\TH{{\ecfont \char"DE}} % Thorn 3606\def\th{{\ecfont \char"FE}} % thorn 3607% 3608\def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}} 3609\def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft} 3610\def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}} 3611\def\guillemotright{\guillemetright} 3612\def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}} 3613\def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}} 3614\def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}} 3615\def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}} 3616% 3617\def\L{{\ecfont \char"8A}} % L with stroke 3618\def\l{{\ecfont \char"AA}} % l with stroke 3619% 3620% This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but 3621% we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases. We put the 3622% tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer 3623% dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc. 3624% 3625% ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using 3626% the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in 3627% the same EC font. 3628\def\ogonek#1{{% 3629 \def\temp{#1}% 3630 \ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek 3631 \else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek 3632 \else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek 3633 \else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek 3634 \else 3635 \ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}% 3636 \ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1% 3637 \else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}% 3638 \fi 3639 \fi\fi\fi\fi 3640 }% 3641} 3642\def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A} 3643\def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a} 3644\def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E} 3645\def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e} 3646% 3647% Use the European Computer Modern fonts (cm-super in outline format) 3648% for non-CM glyphs. That is ec* for regular text and tc* for the text 3649% companion symbols (LaTeX TS1 encoding). Both are part of the ec 3650% package and follow the same conventions. 3651% 3652\def\ecfont{\etcfont{e}} 3653\def\tcfont{\etcfont{t}} 3654% 3655\def\etcfont#1{% 3656 % We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this 3657 % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German 3658 % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so 3659 % hopefully nobody will notice/care. 3660 \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}% 3661 \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% 3662 \ifmonospace 3663 % typewriter: 3664 \font\thisecfont = #1ctt\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 3665 \else 3666 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 3667 % bold: 3668 \font\thisecfont = #1cb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 3669 \else 3670 % regular: 3671 \font\thisecfont = #1c\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 3672 \fi 3673 \fi 3674 \thisecfont 3675} 3676 3677% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really 3678% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now. 3679% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright. 3680% 3681\def\registeredsymbol{% 3682 $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize R}% 3683 \hfil\crcr\Orb}}% 3684 }$% 3685} 3686 3687% @textdegree - the normal degrees sign. 3688% 3689\def\textdegree{$^\circ$} 3690 3691% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with: 3692% Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38 3693% so we'll define it if necessary. 3694% 3695\ifx\Orb\thisisundefined 3696\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D} 3697\fi 3698 3699% Quotes. 3700\chardef\quoteleft=`\` 3701\chardef\quoteright=`\' 3702 3703% only change font for tt for correct kerning and to avoid using 3704% \ecfont unless necessary. 3705\def\quotedblleft{% 3706 \ifmonospace{\ecfont\char"10}\else{\char"5C}\fi 3707} 3708 3709\def\quotedblright{% 3710 \ifmonospace{\ecfont\char"11}\else{\char`\"}\fi 3711} 3712 3713 3714\message{page headings,} 3715 3716\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in 3717\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc 3718 3719% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage. 3720\newif\ifseenauthor 3721\newif\iffinishedtitlepage 3722 3723% @setcontentsaftertitlepage used to do an implicit @contents or 3724% @shortcontents after @end titlepage, but it is now obsolete. 3725\def\setcontentsaftertitlepage{% 3726 \errmessage{@setcontentsaftertitlepage has been removed as a Texinfo 3727 command; move your @contents command if you want the contents 3728 after the title page.}}% 3729\def\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage{% 3730 \errmessage{@setshortcontentsaftertitlepage has been removed as a Texinfo 3731 command; move your @shortcontents and @contents commands if you 3732 want the contents after the title page.}}% 3733 3734\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{% 3735 \begingroup \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% 3736 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} 3737 3738\envdef\titlepage{% 3739 % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage. 3740 \begingroup 3741 \parindent=0pt \textfonts 3742 % Leave some space at the very top of the page. 3743 \vglue\titlepagetopglue 3744 % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. 3745 \finishedtitlepagetrue 3746 % 3747 % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space 3748 % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second. 3749 \let\oldpage = \page 3750 \def\page{% 3751 \iffinishedtitlepage\else 3752 \finishtitlepage 3753 \fi 3754 \let\page = \oldpage 3755 \page 3756 \null 3757 }% 3758} 3759 3760\def\Etitlepage{% 3761 \iffinishedtitlepage\else 3762 \finishtitlepage 3763 \fi 3764 % It is important to do the page break before ending the group, 3765 % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group. 3766 % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page 3767 % after the title page, which we certainly don't want. 3768 \oldpage 3769 \endgroup 3770 % 3771 % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are 3772 % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers. 3773 \HEADINGSon 3774} 3775 3776\def\finishtitlepage{% 3777 \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize 3778 \vskip\titlepagebottomglue 3779 \finishedtitlepagetrue 3780} 3781 3782% Settings used for typesetting titles: no hyphenation, no indentation, 3783% don't worry much about spacing, ragged right. This should be used 3784% inside a \vbox, and fonts need to be set appropriately first. \par should 3785% be specified before the end of the \vbox, since a vbox is a group. 3786% 3787\def\raggedtitlesettings{% 3788 \rm 3789 \hyphenpenalty=10000 3790 \parindent=0pt 3791 \tolerance=5000 3792 \ptexraggedright 3793} 3794 3795% Macros to be used within @titlepage: 3796 3797\let\subtitlerm=\rmfont 3798\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines} 3799 3800\parseargdef\title{% 3801 \checkenv\titlepage 3802 \vbox{\titlefonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}% 3803 % print a rule at the page bottom also. 3804 \finishedtitlepagefalse 3805 \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt 3806} 3807 3808\parseargdef\subtitle{% 3809 \checkenv\titlepage 3810 {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}% 3811} 3812 3813% @author should come last, but may come many times. 3814% It can also be used inside @quotation. 3815% 3816\parseargdef\author{% 3817 \def\temp{\quotation}% 3818 \ifx\thisenv\temp 3819 \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation. 3820 \else 3821 \checkenv\titlepage 3822 \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi 3823 {\secfonts\rm \leftline{#1}}% 3824 \fi 3825} 3826 3827 3828% Set up page headings and footings. 3829 3830\let\thispage=\folio 3831 3832\newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages 3833\newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages 3834\newtoks\evenchapheadline% headline on even pages with a new chapter 3835\newtoks\oddchapheadline % headline on odd pages with a new chapter 3836\newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages 3837\newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages 3838 3839% Now make \makeheadline and \makefootline in Plain TeX use those variables 3840\headline={{\textfonts\rm 3841 \ifchapterpage 3842 \ifodd\pageno\the\oddchapheadline\else\the\evenchapheadline\fi 3843 \else 3844 \ifodd\pageno\the\oddheadline\else\the\evenheadline\fi 3845 \fi}} 3846 3847\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline 3848 \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook} 3849\let\HEADINGShook=\relax 3850 3851% Commands to set those variables. 3852% For example, this is what @headings on does 3853% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter 3854% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle 3855% @evenfooting @thisfile|| 3856% @oddfooting ||@thisfile 3857 3858 3859\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx} 3860\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3861\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3862 \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}} 3863 \global\evenchapheadline=\evenheadline} 3864 3865\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx} 3866\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3867\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3868 \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% 3869 \global\oddchapheadline=\oddheadline} 3870 3871\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}% 3872 3873\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx} 3874\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3875\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3876\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 3877 3878\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx} 3879\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3880\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3881 \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% 3882 % 3883 % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume 3884 % @evenfooting will not be used by itself. 3885 \global\advance\txipageheight by -12pt 3886 \global\advance\vsize by -12pt 3887} 3888 3889\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}} 3890 3891% @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page 3892% @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page 3893% 3894% The same set of arguments for: 3895% 3896% @oddheadingmarks 3897% @evenfootingmarks 3898% @oddfootingmarks 3899% @everyheadingmarks 3900% @everyfootingmarks 3901 3902% These define \getoddheadingmarks, \getevenheadingmarks, 3903% \getoddfootingmarks, and \getevenfootingmarks, each to one of 3904% \gettopheadingmarks, \getbottomheadingmarks. 3905% 3906\def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}} 3907\def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}} 3908\def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}} 3909\def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}} 3910\parseargdef\everyheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1} 3911 \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} } 3912\parseargdef\everyfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1} 3913 \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} } 3914% #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom. 3915\def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {% 3916 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname 3917 \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp 3918} 3919 3920\everyheadingmarks bottom 3921\everyfootingmarks bottom 3922 3923% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing. 3924% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing. 3925% @headings off turns them off. 3926% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility. 3927% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page. 3928% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page. 3929% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page. 3930% By default, they are off at the start of a document, 3931% and turned `on' after @end titlepage. 3932 3933\parseargdef\headings{\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} 3934 3935\def\headingsoff{% non-global headings elimination 3936 \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}\evenchapheadline={\hfil}% 3937 \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}\oddchapheadline={\hfil}% 3938} 3939 3940\def\HEADINGSoff{{\globaldefs=1 \headingsoff}} % global setting 3941\HEADINGSoff % it's the default 3942 3943% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1. 3944\def\pageone{ 3945 \global\pageno=1 3946 \global\arabiccount = \pagecount 3947} 3948 3949% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner, 3950% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document 3951% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top 3952% edge of all pages. 3953\def\HEADINGSdouble{% 3954\pageone 3955\HEADINGSdoublex 3956} 3957\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3958 3959% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page, 3960% page number on top right. 3961\def\HEADINGSsingle{% 3962\pageone 3963\HEADINGSsinglex 3964} 3965\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} 3966 3967\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex} 3968\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter 3969\def\HEADINGSdoublex{% 3970\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3971\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3972\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} 3973\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3974\global\evenchapheadline={\line{\folio\hfil}} 3975\global\oddchapheadline={\line{\hfil\folio}} 3976\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 3977} 3978 3979\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex} 3980\def\HEADINGSsinglex{% 3981\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3982\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3983\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3984\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3985\global\evenchapheadline={\line{\hfil\folio}} 3986\global\oddchapheadline={\line{\hfil\folio}} 3987\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3988} 3989 3990% for @setchapternewpage off 3991\def\HEADINGSsinglechapoff{% 3992\pageone 3993\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3994\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3995\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3996\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3997\global\evenchapheadline=\evenheadline 3998\global\oddchapheadline=\oddheadline 3999\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 4000} 4001 4002% Subroutines used in generating headings 4003% This produces Day Month Year style of output. 4004% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set 4005% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this). 4006\ifx\today\thisisundefined 4007\def\today{% 4008 \number\day\space 4009 \ifcase\month 4010 \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr 4011 \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug 4012 \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec 4013 \fi 4014 \space\number\year} 4015\fi 4016 4017% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings. 4018% It generates no output of its own. 4019\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle} 4020\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}} 4021 4022 4023\message{tables,} 4024% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x). 4025 4026% default indentation of table text 4027\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in 4028% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text 4029\newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in 4030% margin between end of table item and start of table text. 4031\newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in 4032 4033% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin 4034\newdimen\itemmax 4035 4036% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with 4037% these defs. 4038% They also define \itemindex 4039% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none). 4040 4041\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip 4042 4043\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi} 4044 4045\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} 4046\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} 4047 4048\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup % 4049 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip 4050 \advance\hsize by -\tableindent 4051 \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}% 4052 \itemindex{#1}% 4053 \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. 4054 % 4055 % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line 4056 % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that 4057 % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next 4058 % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the 4059 % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space. 4060 \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax 4061 % 4062 % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping, 4063 % but leave it ragged-right. 4064 \begingroup 4065 \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent 4066 \advance\hsize by\tableindent 4067 \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil\relax 4068 \leavevmode\unhbox0\par 4069 \endgroup 4070 % 4071 % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the 4072 % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started. 4073 \nobreak \vskip-\parskip 4074 % 4075 % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if 4076 % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no 4077 % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would 4078 % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this 4079 % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert 4080 % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also. 4081 % 4082 \penalty 10001 4083 \endgroup 4084 \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse 4085 \else 4086 % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the 4087 % following text (if any) will end up on the same line. 4088 \noindent 4089 % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in 4090 % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and 4091 % eventually be printed. 4092 \nobreak\kern-\tableindent 4093 \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 4094 \unhbox0 4095 \nobreak\kern\dimen0 4096 \endgroup 4097 \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue 4098 \fi 4099} 4100 4101\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}} 4102\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}} 4103 4104% @table, @ftable, @vtable. 4105\envdef\table{% 4106 \let\itemindex\gobble 4107 \tablecheck{table}% 4108} 4109\envdef\ftable{% 4110 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}% 4111 \tablecheck{ftable}% 4112} 4113\envdef\vtable{% 4114 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}% 4115 \tablecheck{vtable}% 4116} 4117\def\tablecheck#1{% 4118 \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active 4119 \endgroup 4120 \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is 4121 that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}% 4122 \def\next{\doignore{#1}}% 4123 \else 4124 \let\next\tablex 4125 \fi 4126 \next 4127} 4128\def\tablex#1{% 4129 \def\itemindicate{#1}% 4130 \parsearg\tabley 4131} 4132\def\tabley#1{% 4133 {% 4134 \makevalueexpandable 4135 \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}% 4136 \expandafter 4137 }\temp \endtablez 4138} 4139\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{% 4140 \aboveenvbreak 4141 \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi 4142 \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi 4143 \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi 4144 \itemmax=\tableindent 4145 \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin 4146 \advance \leftskip by \tableindent 4147 \exdentamount=\tableindent 4148 \parindent = 0pt 4149 \parskip = \smallskipamount 4150 \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi 4151 \let\item = \internalBitem 4152 \let\itemx = \internalBitemx 4153} 4154\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak} 4155\let\Eftable\Etable 4156\let\Evtable\Etable 4157\let\Eitemize\Etable 4158\let\Eenumerate\Etable 4159 4160% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize 4161 4162\newcount \itemno 4163 4164\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize} 4165 4166\def\doitemize#1{% 4167 \aboveenvbreak 4168 \itemmax=\itemindent 4169 \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin 4170 \advance\leftskip by \itemindent 4171 \exdentamount=\itemindent 4172 \parindent=0pt 4173 \parskip=\smallskipamount 4174 \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi 4175 % 4176 % Try typesetting the item mark so that if the document erroneously says 4177 % something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error 4178 % right away at the @itemize. It's not the best error message in the 4179 % world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item. This means if 4180 % the user wants an empty mark, they have to say @w{} not just @w. 4181 \def\itemcontents{#1}% 4182 \setbox0 = \hbox{\itemcontents}% 4183 % 4184 % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet. 4185 \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi 4186 % 4187 \let\item=\itemizeitem 4188} 4189 4190% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate. 4191% 4192\def\itemizeitem{% 4193 \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations 4194 {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break 4195 {% 4196 % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a 4197 % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have 4198 % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero 4199 % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the 4200 % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there 4201 % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much 4202 % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least 4203 % that's the theory. 4204 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi 4205 \noindent 4206 \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}% 4207 % 4208 \ifinner\else 4209 \vadjust{\penalty 1200}% not good to break after first line of item. 4210 \fi 4211 % We can be in inner vertical mode in a footnote, although an 4212 % @itemize looks awful there. 4213 }% 4214 \flushcr 4215} 4216 4217% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in 4218% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder. 4219% 4220\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}% 4221 4222% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter, 4223% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No 4224% argument is the same as `1'. 4225% 4226\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey} 4227\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{% 4228 % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'. 4229 \def\thearg{#1}% 4230 \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi 4231 % 4232 % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a 4233 % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number. 4234 % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made. 4235 % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at 4236 % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.) 4237 \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark 4238 \ifx\rest\empty 4239 % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything. 4240 % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero. 4241 % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and 4242 % not equal to itself. 4243 % Otherwise, we assume it's a number. 4244 % 4245 % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from 4246 % continuing to look for a <number>. 4247 % 4248 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax 4249 \numericenumerate % a number (we hope) 4250 \else 4251 % It's a letter. 4252 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax 4253 \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter 4254 \else 4255 \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter 4256 \fi 4257 \fi 4258 \else 4259 % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number. 4260 \numericenumerate 4261 \fi 4262} 4263 4264% An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is 4265% given in \thearg. 4266% 4267\def\numericenumerate{% 4268 \itemno = \thearg 4269 \startenumeration{\the\itemno}% 4270} 4271 4272% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg. 4273\def\lowercaseenumerate{% 4274 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg 4275 \startenumeration{% 4276 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. 4277 \ifnum\itemno=0 4278 \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger 4279 alphabet}% 4280 \fi 4281 \char\lccode\itemno 4282 }% 4283} 4284 4285% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg. 4286\def\uppercaseenumerate{% 4287 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg 4288 \startenumeration{% 4289 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. 4290 \ifnum\itemno=0 4291 \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger 4292 alphabet} 4293 \fi 4294 \char\uccode\itemno 4295 }% 4296} 4297 4298% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the 4299% common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in 4300% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno. 4301% 4302\def\startenumeration#1{% 4303 \advance\itemno by -1 4304 \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr 4305} 4306 4307 4308% @multitable macros 4309 4310% Macros used to set up halign preamble: 4311% 4312\let\endsetuptable\relax 4313\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} 4314\let\columnfractions\relax 4315\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions} 4316\newif\ifsetpercent 4317 4318% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might 4319% be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is. 4320% 4321\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {% 4322 \global\advance\colcount by 1 4323 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}% 4324 \setuptable 4325} 4326 4327\newcount\colcount 4328\def\setuptable#1{% 4329 \def\firstarg{#1}% 4330 \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable 4331 \let\go = \relax 4332 \else 4333 \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions 4334 \global\setpercenttrue 4335 \else 4336 \ifsetpercent 4337 \let\go\pickupwholefraction 4338 \else 4339 \global\advance\colcount by 1 4340 \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a 4341 % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway. 4342 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% 4343 \fi 4344 \fi 4345 \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction 4346 % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so 4347 % we'll always have a period there to be parsed. 4348 \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}% 4349 \else 4350 \let\go = \setuptable 4351 \fi% 4352 \fi 4353 \go 4354} 4355 4356% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold. Assignments 4357% have to be global since we are inside the implicit group of an 4358% alignment entry. \everycr below resets \everytab so we don't have to 4359% undo it ourselves. 4360\def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable 4361\def\headitem{% 4362 \checkenv\multitable 4363 \crcr 4364 \gdef\headitemcrhook{\nobreak}% attempt to avoid page break after headings 4365 \global\everytab={\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs 4366 \the\everytab % for the first item 4367}% 4368% 4369% default for tables with no headings. 4370\let\headitemcrhook=\relax 4371% 4372\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}% 4373 4374\newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab. 4375% 4376\envdef\multitable{% 4377 \vskip\parskip 4378 \startsavinginserts 4379 % 4380 % @item within a multitable starts a normal row. 4381 % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries 4382 % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka 4383 % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize. 4384 \def\item{\crcr}% 4385 % 4386 \tolerance=9500 4387 \hbadness=9500 4388 \parskip=0pt 4389 \parindent=6pt 4390 \overfullrule=0pt 4391 \global\colcount=0 4392 % 4393 \everycr = {% 4394 \noalign{% 4395 \global\everytab={}% Reset from possible headitem. 4396 \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter. 4397 % 4398 % Check for saved footnotes, etc.: 4399 \checkinserts 4400 % 4401 % Perhaps a \nobreak, then reset: 4402 \headitemcrhook 4403 \global\let\headitemcrhook=\relax 4404 }% 4405 }% 4406 % 4407 \parsearg\domultitable 4408} 4409\def\domultitable#1{% 4410 % To parse everything between @multitable and @item: 4411 \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable 4412 % 4413 % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will 4414 % be used as many times as user calls for columns. 4415 % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and 4416 % continue for many paragraphs if desired. 4417 \halign\bgroup &% 4418 \global\advance\colcount by 1 4419 \strut 4420 \vtop{% 4421 \advance\hsize by -1\leftskip 4422 % Find the correct column width 4423 \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname 4424 % 4425 \rightskip=0pt 4426 \ifnum\colcount=1 4427 \advance\hsize by\leftskip % Add indent of surrounding text 4428 \else 4429 % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other. 4430 \leftskip=12pt 4431 \ifsetpercent \else 4432 % If a template has been used 4433 \advance\hsize by \leftskip 4434 \fi 4435 \fi 4436 \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\strut 4437 }\cr 4438} 4439\def\Emultitable{% 4440 \crcr 4441 \egroup % end the \halign 4442 \global\setpercentfalse 4443} 4444 4445 4446\message{conditionals,} 4447 4448% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext, 4449% @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't 4450% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we 4451% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't 4452% attempt to close an environment group. 4453% 4454\def\makecond#1{% 4455 \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax 4456 \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1 4457} 4458\makecond{iftex} 4459\makecond{ifnotdocbook} 4460\makecond{ifnothtml} 4461\makecond{ifnotinfo} 4462\makecond{ifnotplaintext} 4463\makecond{ifnotxml} 4464 4465% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like. 4466% 4467\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} 4468\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}} 4469\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}} 4470\def\html{\doignore{html}} 4471\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}} 4472\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} 4473\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} 4474\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}} 4475\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}} 4476\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}} 4477\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} 4478\def\menu{\doignore{menu}} 4479\def\xml{\doignore{xml}} 4480 4481% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals. 4482% 4483% A count to remember the depth of nesting. 4484\newcount\doignorecount 4485 4486\def\doignore#1{\begingroup 4487 % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode: 4488 \obeylines 4489 \catcode`\@ = \other 4490 \catcode`\{ = \other 4491 \catcode`\} = \other 4492 % 4493 % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. 4494 \spaceisspace 4495 % 4496 % Count number of #1's that we've seen. 4497 \doignorecount = 0 4498 % 4499 % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'. 4500 \dodoignore{#1}% 4501} 4502 4503{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source. 4504 \obeylines % 4505 % 4506 \gdef\dodoignore#1{% 4507 % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'. 4508 % 4509 % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'. 4510 \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{% 4511 \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}% 4512 % 4513 % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a 4514 % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for 4515 % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.) 4516 \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}% 4517 % 4518 % And now expand that command. 4519 \doignoretext ^^M% 4520 }% 4521} 4522 4523\def\doignoreyyy#1{% 4524 \def\temp{#1}% 4525 \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found. 4526 \let\next\doignoretextzzz 4527 \else % Found a nested condition, ... 4528 \advance\doignorecount by 1 4529 \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another. 4530 % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example). 4531 \fi 4532 \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro. 4533} 4534 4535% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_". 4536% 4537\def\doignoretextzzz#1{% 4538 \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end. 4539 \let\next\enddoignore 4540 \else % Still inside a nested condition. 4541 \advance\doignorecount by -1 4542 \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end. 4543 \fi 4544 \next 4545} 4546 4547% Finish off ignored text. 4548{ \obeylines% 4549 % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim 4550 % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional 4551 % would result in a blank line in the output. 4552 \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}% 4553} 4554 4555 4556% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. 4557% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE. 4558% 4559% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be 4560% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our 4561% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we 4562% didn't need it. 4563% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10. 4564% 4565\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} 4566\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% 4567 {% 4568 \makevalueexpandable 4569 \def\temp{#2}% 4570 \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}% 4571 \ifx\temp\empty 4572 \next{}% 4573 \else 4574 \setzzz#2\endsetzzz 4575 \fi 4576 }% 4577} 4578% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. 4579\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}} 4580 4581% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. 4582% 4583\parseargdef\clear{% 4584 {% 4585 \makevalueexpandable 4586 \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax 4587 }% 4588} 4589 4590% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. 4591\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx} 4592\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup} 4593{ 4594 \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active 4595 % 4596 \gdef\makevalueexpandable{% 4597 \let\value = \expandablevalue 4598 % We don't want these characters active, ... 4599 \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other 4600 % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if 4601 % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though. 4602 % So \let them to their normal equivalents. 4603 \let-\normaldash \let_\normalunderscore 4604 } 4605} 4606 4607\def\expandablevalue#1{% 4608 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax 4609 {[No value for ``#1'']}% 4610 \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}% 4611 \else 4612 \csname SET#1\endcsname 4613 \fi 4614} 4615 4616% Like \expandablevalue, but completely expandable (the \message in the 4617% definition above operates at the execution level of TeX). Used when 4618% writing to auxiliary files, due to the expansion that \write does. 4619% If flag is undefined, pass through an unexpanded @value command: maybe it 4620% will be set by the time it is read back in. 4621% 4622% NB flag names containing - or _ may not work here. 4623\def\dummyvalue#1{% 4624 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax 4625 \string\value{#1}% 4626 \else 4627 \csname SET#1\endcsname 4628 \fi 4629} 4630 4631% Used for @value's in index entries to form the sort key: expand the @value 4632% if possible, otherwise sort late. 4633\def\indexnofontsvalue#1{% 4634 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax 4635 ZZZZZZZ% 4636 \else 4637 \csname SET#1\endcsname 4638 \fi 4639} 4640 4641% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined 4642% with @set. 4643% 4644% To get the special treatment we need for `@end ifset,' we call 4645% \makecond and then redefine. 4646% 4647\makecond{ifset} 4648\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}} 4649\def\doifset#1#2{% 4650 {% 4651 \makevalueexpandable 4652 \let\next=\empty 4653 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax 4654 #1% If not set, redefine \next. 4655 \fi 4656 \expandafter 4657 }\next 4658} 4659\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}} 4660 4661% @ifclear VAR ... @end executes the `...' iff VAR has never been 4662% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. 4663% 4664% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the 4665% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set, 4666% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail. 4667% 4668\makecond{ifclear} 4669\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}} 4670\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}} 4671 4672% @ifcommandisdefined CMD ... @end executes the `...' if CMD (written 4673% without the @) is in fact defined. We can only feasibly check at the 4674% TeX level, so something like `mathcode' is going to considered 4675% defined even though it is not a Texinfo command. 4676% 4677\makecond{ifcommanddefined} 4678\def\ifcommanddefined{\parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\let\next=\ifcmddefinedfail}}} 4679% 4680\def\doifcmddefined#1#2{{% 4681 \makevalueexpandable 4682 \let\next=\empty 4683 \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\relax 4684 #1% If not defined, \let\next as above. 4685 \fi 4686 \expandafter 4687 }\next 4688} 4689\def\ifcmddefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommanddefined}} 4690 4691% @ifcommandnotdefined CMD ... handled similar to @ifclear above. 4692\makecond{ifcommandnotdefined} 4693\def\ifcommandnotdefined{% 4694 \parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\else \let\next=\ifcmdnotdefinedfail}}} 4695\def\ifcmdnotdefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommandnotdefined}} 4696 4697% Set the `txicommandconditionals' variable, so documents have a way to 4698% test if the @ifcommand...defined conditionals are available. 4699\set txicommandconditionals 4700 4701% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file 4702% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX. 4703\let\dircategory=\comment 4704 4705% @defininfoenclose. 4706\let\definfoenclose=\comment 4707 4708 4709\message{indexing,} 4710% Index generation facilities 4711 4712% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite 4713% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's. 4714\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}} 4715 4716% \newindex {foo} defines an index named IX. 4717% It automatically defines \IXindex such that 4718% \IXindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index IX. 4719% It also defines \IXindfile to be the number of the output channel for 4720% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is IX. 4721% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long 4722% for the sake of vms. 4723% 4724\def\newindex#1{% 4725 \expandafter\chardef\csname#1indfile\endcsname=0 4726 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index 4727 \noexpand\doindex{#1}} 4728} 4729 4730% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo} 4731% 4732\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex} 4733 4734% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. 4735% 4736\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} 4737% 4738\def\newcodeindex#1{% 4739 \expandafter\chardef\csname#1indfile\endcsname=0 4740 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% 4741 \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}% 4742} 4743 4744% The default indices: 4745\newindex{cp}% concepts, 4746\newcodeindex{fn}% functions, 4747\newcodeindex{vr}% variables, 4748\newcodeindex{tp}% types, 4749\newcodeindex{ky}% keys 4750\newcodeindex{pg}% and programs. 4751 4752 4753% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar. 4754% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. 4755% 4756% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo 4757% inside @code. 4758% 4759\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}} 4760\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}} 4761 4762% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo), 4763% #3 the target index (bar). 4764\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{% 4765 \requireopenindexfile{#3}% 4766 % redefine \fooindfile: 4767 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname 4768 \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp 4769 % redefine \fooindex: 4770 \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}% 4771} 4772 4773% Define \doindex, the driver for all index macros. 4774% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro, 4775% and it is the two-letter name of the index. 4776 4777\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\doindexxxx} 4778\def\doindexxxx #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}} 4779 4780% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument. 4781\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\docodeindexxxx} 4782\def\docodeindexxxx #1{\docind{\indexname}{#1}} 4783 4784 4785% Used for the aux, toc and index files to prevent expansion of Texinfo 4786% commands. 4787% 4788\def\atdummies{% 4789 \definedummyletter\@% 4790 \definedummyletter\ % 4791 \definedummyletter\{% 4792 \definedummyletter\}% 4793 \definedummyletter\&% 4794 % 4795 % Do the redefinitions. 4796 \definedummies 4797 \otherbackslash 4798} 4799 4800% \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively 4801% preventing its expansion. This is used only for control words, 4802% not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for 4803% control characters, but is needed to separate the control word 4804% from whatever follows. 4805% 4806% These can be used both for control words that take an argument and 4807% those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then 4808% that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever). 4809% 4810% For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the 4811% space. 4812% 4813\def\definedummyword #1{\def#1{\string#1\space}}% 4814\def\definedummyletter#1{\def#1{\string#1}}% 4815\let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter 4816 4817% Called from \atdummies to prevent the expansion of commands. 4818% 4819\def\definedummies{% 4820 % 4821 \let\commondummyword\definedummyword 4822 \let\commondummyletter\definedummyletter 4823 \let\commondummyaccent\definedummyaccent 4824 \commondummiesnofonts 4825 % 4826 \definedummyletter\_% 4827 \definedummyletter\-% 4828 % 4829 % Non-English letters. 4830 \definedummyword\AA 4831 \definedummyword\AE 4832 \definedummyword\DH 4833 \definedummyword\L 4834 \definedummyword\O 4835 \definedummyword\OE 4836 \definedummyword\TH 4837 \definedummyword\aa 4838 \definedummyword\ae 4839 \definedummyword\dh 4840 \definedummyword\exclamdown 4841 \definedummyword\l 4842 \definedummyword\o 4843 \definedummyword\oe 4844 \definedummyword\ordf 4845 \definedummyword\ordm 4846 \definedummyword\questiondown 4847 \definedummyword\ss 4848 \definedummyword\th 4849 % 4850 % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do. 4851 \definedummyword\bf 4852 \definedummyword\gtr 4853 \definedummyword\hat 4854 \definedummyword\less 4855 \definedummyword\sf 4856 \definedummyword\sl 4857 \definedummyword\tclose 4858 \definedummyword\tt 4859 % 4860 \definedummyword\LaTeX 4861 \definedummyword\TeX 4862 % 4863 % Assorted special characters. 4864 \definedummyword\ampchar 4865 \definedummyword\atchar 4866 \definedummyword\arrow 4867 \definedummyword\backslashchar 4868 \definedummyword\bullet 4869 \definedummyword\comma 4870 \definedummyword\copyright 4871 \definedummyword\registeredsymbol 4872 \definedummyword\dots 4873 \definedummyword\enddots 4874 \definedummyword\entrybreak 4875 \definedummyword\equiv 4876 \definedummyword\error 4877 \definedummyword\euro 4878 \definedummyword\expansion 4879 \definedummyword\geq 4880 \definedummyword\guillemetleft 4881 \definedummyword\guillemetright 4882 \definedummyword\guilsinglleft 4883 \definedummyword\guilsinglright 4884 \definedummyword\lbracechar 4885 \definedummyword\leq 4886 \definedummyword\mathopsup 4887 \definedummyword\minus 4888 \definedummyword\ogonek 4889 \definedummyword\pounds 4890 \definedummyword\point 4891 \definedummyword\print 4892 \definedummyword\quotedblbase 4893 \definedummyword\quotedblleft 4894 \definedummyword\quotedblright 4895 \definedummyword\quoteleft 4896 \definedummyword\quoteright 4897 \definedummyword\quotesinglbase 4898 \definedummyword\rbracechar 4899 \definedummyword\result 4900 \definedummyword\sub 4901 \definedummyword\sup 4902 \definedummyword\textdegree 4903 % 4904 \definedummyword\subentry 4905 % 4906 % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write. 4907 \macrolist 4908 \let\value\dummyvalue 4909 % 4910 \normalturnoffactive 4911} 4912 4913% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \definedummies and \indexnofonts. 4914% Define \commondummyletter, \commondummyaccent and \commondummyword before 4915% using. Used for accents, font commands, and various control letters. 4916% 4917\def\commondummiesnofonts{% 4918 % Control letters and accents. 4919 \commondummyletter\!% 4920 \commondummyaccent\"% 4921 \commondummyaccent\'% 4922 \commondummyletter\*% 4923 \commondummyaccent\,% 4924 \commondummyletter\.% 4925 \commondummyletter\/% 4926 \commondummyletter\:% 4927 \commondummyaccent\=% 4928 \commondummyletter\?% 4929 \commondummyaccent\^% 4930 \commondummyaccent\`% 4931 \commondummyaccent\~% 4932 \commondummyword\u 4933 \commondummyword\v 4934 \commondummyword\H 4935 \commondummyword\dotaccent 4936 \commondummyword\ogonek 4937 \commondummyword\ringaccent 4938 \commondummyword\tieaccent 4939 \commondummyword\ubaraccent 4940 \commondummyword\udotaccent 4941 \commondummyword\dotless 4942 % 4943 % Texinfo font commands. 4944 \commondummyword\b 4945 \commondummyword\i 4946 \commondummyword\r 4947 \commondummyword\sansserif 4948 \commondummyword\sc 4949 \commondummyword\slanted 4950 \commondummyword\t 4951 % 4952 % Commands that take arguments. 4953 \commondummyword\abbr 4954 \commondummyword\acronym 4955 \commondummyword\anchor 4956 \commondummyword\cite 4957 \commondummyword\code 4958 \commondummyword\command 4959 \commondummyword\dfn 4960 \commondummyword\dmn 4961 \commondummyword\email 4962 \commondummyword\emph 4963 \commondummyword\env 4964 \commondummyword\file 4965 \commondummyword\image 4966 \commondummyword\indicateurl 4967 \commondummyword\inforef 4968 \commondummyword\kbd 4969 \commondummyword\key 4970 \commondummyword\math 4971 \commondummyword\option 4972 \commondummyword\pxref 4973 \commondummyword\ref 4974 \commondummyword\samp 4975 \commondummyword\strong 4976 \commondummyword\tie 4977 \commondummyword\U 4978 \commondummyword\uref 4979 \commondummyword\url 4980 \commondummyword\var 4981 \commondummyword\verb 4982 \commondummyword\w 4983 \commondummyword\xref 4984} 4985 4986\let\indexlbrace\relax 4987\let\indexrbrace\relax 4988\let\indexatchar\relax 4989\let\indexbackslash\relax 4990 4991{\catcode`\@=0 4992\catcode`\\=13 4993 @gdef@backslashdisappear{@def\{}} 4994} 4995 4996{ 4997\catcode`\<=13 4998\catcode`\-=13 4999\catcode`\`=13 5000 \gdef\indexnonalnumdisappear{% 5001 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlquoteignore\endcsname\relax\else 5002 % @set txiindexlquoteignore makes us ignore left quotes in the sort term. 5003 % (Introduced for FSFS 2nd ed.) 5004 \let`=\empty 5005 \fi 5006 % 5007 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexbackslashignore\endcsname\relax\else 5008 \backslashdisappear 5009 \fi 5010 % 5011 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexhyphenignore\endcsname\relax\else 5012 \def-{}% 5013 \fi 5014 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlessthanignore\endcsname\relax\else 5015 \def<{}% 5016 \fi 5017 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexatsignignore\endcsname\relax\else 5018 \def\@{}% 5019 \fi 5020 } 5021 5022 \gdef\indexnonalnumreappear{% 5023 \let-\normaldash 5024 \let<\normalless 5025 } 5026} 5027 5028 5029% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index 5030% by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all 5031% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string 5032% would be for a given command (usually its argument). 5033% 5034\def\indexnofonts{% 5035 % Accent commands should become @asis. 5036 \def\commondummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}% 5037 % We can just ignore other control letters. 5038 \def\commondummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}% 5039 % All control words become @asis by default; overrides below. 5040 \let\commondummyword\commondummyaccent 5041 \commondummiesnofonts 5042 % 5043 % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command 5044 % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc. 5045 % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands. 5046 %\let\tt=\asis 5047 % 5048 \def\ { }% 5049 \def\@{@}% 5050 \def\_{\normalunderscore}% 5051 \def\-{}% @- shouldn't affect sorting 5052 % 5053 \uccode`\1=`\{ \uppercase{\def\{{1}}% 5054 \uccode`\1=`\} \uppercase{\def\}{1}}% 5055 \let\lbracechar\{% 5056 \let\rbracechar\}% 5057 % 5058 % Non-English letters. 5059 \def\AA{AA}% 5060 \def\AE{AE}% 5061 \def\DH{DZZ}% 5062 \def\L{L}% 5063 \def\OE{OE}% 5064 \def\O{O}% 5065 \def\TH{TH}% 5066 \def\aa{aa}% 5067 \def\ae{ae}% 5068 \def\dh{dzz}% 5069 \def\exclamdown{!}% 5070 \def\l{l}% 5071 \def\oe{oe}% 5072 \def\ordf{a}% 5073 \def\ordm{o}% 5074 \def\o{o}% 5075 \def\questiondown{?}% 5076 \def\ss{ss}% 5077 \def\th{th}% 5078 % 5079 \let\do\indexnofontsdef 5080 % 5081 \do\LaTeX{LaTeX}% 5082 \do\TeX{TeX}% 5083 % 5084 % Assorted special characters. 5085 \do\atchar{@}% 5086 \do\arrow{->}% 5087 \do\bullet{bullet}% 5088 \do\comma{,}% 5089 \do\copyright{copyright}% 5090 \do\dots{...}% 5091 \do\enddots{...}% 5092 \do\equiv{==}% 5093 \do\error{error}% 5094 \do\euro{euro}% 5095 \do\expansion{==>}% 5096 \do\geq{>=}% 5097 \do\guillemetleft{<<}% 5098 \do\guillemetright{>>}% 5099 \do\guilsinglleft{<}% 5100 \do\guilsinglright{>}% 5101 \do\leq{<=}% 5102 \do\lbracechar{\{}% 5103 \do\minus{-}% 5104 \do\point{.}% 5105 \do\pounds{pounds}% 5106 \do\print{-|}% 5107 \do\quotedblbase{"}% 5108 \do\quotedblleft{"}% 5109 \do\quotedblright{"}% 5110 \do\quoteleft{`}% 5111 \do\quoteright{'}% 5112 \do\quotesinglbase{,}% 5113 \do\rbracechar{\}}% 5114 \do\registeredsymbol{R}% 5115 \do\result{=>}% 5116 \do\textdegree{o}% 5117 % 5118 % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present). 5119 % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now. 5120 % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up 5121 % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry 5122 % that starts with \. 5123 % 5124 % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them 5125 % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that 5126 % goes to end-of-line is not handled. 5127 % 5128 \macrolist 5129 \let\value\indexnofontsvalue 5130} 5131 5132% Give the control sequence a definition that removes the {} that follows 5133% its use, e.g. @AA{} -> AA 5134\def\indexnofontsdef#1#2{\def#1##1{#2}}% 5135 5136 5137 5138 5139% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text. 5140\def\doind#1#2{% 5141 \iflinks 5142 {% 5143 % 5144 \requireopenindexfile{#1}% 5145 \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}% 5146 % 5147 \def\indextext{#2}% 5148 \safewhatsit\doindwrite 5149 }% 5150 \fi 5151} 5152 5153% Same as \doind, but for code indices 5154\def\docind#1#2{% 5155 \iflinks 5156 {% 5157 % 5158 \requireopenindexfile{#1}% 5159 \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}% 5160 % 5161 \def\indextext{#2}% 5162 \safewhatsit\docindwrite 5163 }% 5164 \fi 5165} 5166 5167% Check if an index file has been opened, and if not, open it. 5168\def\requireopenindexfile#1{% 5169\ifnum\csname #1indfile\endcsname=0 5170 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname 5171 \edef\suffix{#1}% 5172 % A .fls suffix would conflict with the file extension for the output 5173 % of -recorder, so use .f1s instead. 5174 \ifx\suffix\indexisfl\def\suffix{f1}\fi 5175 % Open the file 5176 \immediate\openout\csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.\suffix 5177 % Using \immediate above here prevents an object entering into the current 5178 % box, which could confound checks such as those in \safewhatsit for 5179 % preceding skips. 5180 \typeout{Writing index file \jobname.\suffix}% 5181\fi} 5182\def\indexisfl{fl} 5183 5184% Definition for writing index entry sort key. 5185{ 5186\catcode`\-=13 5187\gdef\indexwritesortas{% 5188 \begingroup 5189 \indexnonalnumreappear 5190 \indexwritesortasxxx} 5191\gdef\indexwritesortasxxx#1{% 5192 \xdef\indexsortkey{#1}\endgroup} 5193} 5194 5195\def\indexwriteseealso#1{ 5196 \gdef\pagenumbertext{\string\seealso{#1}}% 5197} 5198\def\indexwriteseeentry#1{ 5199 \gdef\pagenumbertext{\string\seeentry{#1}}% 5200} 5201 5202% The default definitions 5203\def\sortas#1{}% 5204\def\seealso#1{\i{\putwordSeeAlso}\ #1}% for sorted index file only 5205\def\putwordSeeAlso{See also} 5206\def\seeentry#1{\i{\putwordSee}\ #1}% for sorted index file only 5207 5208 5209% Given index entry text like "aaa @subentry bbb @sortas{ZZZ}": 5210% * Set \bracedtext to "{aaa}{bbb}" 5211% * Set \fullindexsortkey to "aaa @subentry ZZZ" 5212% * If @seealso occurs, set \pagenumbertext 5213% 5214\def\splitindexentry#1{% 5215 \gdef\fullindexsortkey{}% 5216 \xdef\bracedtext{}% 5217 \def\sep{}% 5218 \def\seealso##1{}% 5219 \def\seeentry##1{}% 5220 \expandafter\doindexsegment#1\subentry\finish\subentry 5221} 5222 5223% append the results from the next segment 5224\def\doindexsegment#1\subentry{% 5225 \def\segment{#1}% 5226 \ifx\segment\isfinish 5227 \else 5228 % 5229 % Fully expand the segment, throwing away any @sortas directives, and 5230 % trim spaces. 5231 \edef\trimmed{\segment}% 5232 \edef\trimmed{\expandafter\eatspaces\expandafter{\trimmed}}% 5233 \ifincodeindex 5234 \edef\trimmed{\noexpand\code{\trimmed}}% 5235 \fi 5236 % 5237 \xdef\bracedtext{\bracedtext{\trimmed}}% 5238 % 5239 % Get the string to sort by. Process the segment with all 5240 % font commands turned off. 5241 \bgroup 5242 \let\sortas\indexwritesortas 5243 \let\seealso\indexwriteseealso 5244 \let\seeentry\indexwriteseeentry 5245 \indexnofonts 5246 % The braces around the commands are recognized by texindex. 5247 \def\lbracechar{{\string\indexlbrace}}% 5248 \def\rbracechar{{\string\indexrbrace}}% 5249 \let\{=\lbracechar 5250 \let\}=\rbracechar 5251 \def\@{{\string\indexatchar}}% 5252 \def\atchar##1{\@}% 5253 \def\backslashchar{{\string\indexbackslash}}% 5254 \uccode`\~=`\\ \uppercase{\let~\backslashchar}% 5255 % 5256 \let\indexsortkey\empty 5257 \global\let\pagenumbertext\empty 5258 % Execute the segment and throw away the typeset output. This executes 5259 % any @sortas or @seealso commands in this segment. 5260 \setbox\dummybox = \hbox{\segment}% 5261 \ifx\indexsortkey\empty{% 5262 \indexnonalnumdisappear 5263 \xdef\trimmed{\segment}% 5264 \xdef\trimmed{\expandafter\eatspaces\expandafter{\trimmed}}% 5265 \xdef\indexsortkey{\trimmed}% 5266 \ifx\indexsortkey\empty\xdef\indexsortkey{ }\fi 5267 }\fi 5268 % 5269 % Append to \fullindexsortkey. 5270 \edef\tmp{\gdef\noexpand\fullindexsortkey{% 5271 \fullindexsortkey\sep\indexsortkey}}% 5272 \tmp 5273 \egroup 5274 \def\sep{\subentry}% 5275 % 5276 \expandafter\doindexsegment 5277 \fi 5278} 5279\def\isfinish{\finish}% 5280\newbox\dummybox % used above 5281 5282\let\subentry\relax 5283 5284% Use \ instead of @ in index files. To support old texi2dvi and texindex. 5285% This works without changing the escape character used in the toc or aux 5286% files because the index entries are fully expanded here, and \string uses 5287% the current value of \escapechar. 5288\def\escapeisbackslash{\escapechar=`\\} 5289 5290% Use \ in index files by default. texi2dvi didn't support @ as the escape 5291% character (as it checked for "\entry" in the files, and not "@entry"). When 5292% the new version of texi2dvi has had a chance to become more prevalent, then 5293% the escape character can change back to @ again. This should be an easy 5294% change to make now because both @ and \ are only used as escape characters in 5295% index files, never standing for themselves. 5296% 5297\set txiindexescapeisbackslash 5298 5299% Write the entry in \indextext to the index file. 5300% 5301 5302\newif\ifincodeindex 5303\def\doindwrite{\incodeindexfalse\doindwritex} 5304\def\docindwrite{\incodeindextrue\doindwritex} 5305 5306\def\doindwritex{% 5307 \maybemarginindex 5308 % 5309 \atdummies 5310 % 5311 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexescapeisbackslash\endcsname\relax\else 5312 \escapeisbackslash 5313 \fi 5314 % 5315 % For texindex which always views { and } as separators. 5316 \def\{{\lbracechar{}}% 5317 \def\}{\rbracechar{}}% 5318 \uccode`\~=`\\ \uppercase{\def~{\backslashchar{}}}% 5319 % 5320 % Split the entry into primary entry and any subentries, and get the index 5321 % sort key. 5322 \splitindexentry\indextext 5323 % 5324 % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and 5325 % the original text, including any font commands. We write 5326 % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the 5327 % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s 5328 % sorted result. 5329 % 5330 \edef\temp{% 5331 \write\writeto{% 5332 \string\entry{\fullindexsortkey}% 5333 {\ifx\pagenumbertext\empty\noexpand\folio\else\pagenumbertext\fi}% 5334 \bracedtext}% 5335 }% 5336 \temp 5337} 5338 5339% Put the index entry in the margin if desired (undocumented). 5340\def\maybemarginindex{% 5341 \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else 5342 \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \relax\indextext}}% 5343 \fi 5344} 5345\let\SETmarginindex=\relax 5346 5347 5348% Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit: 5349% 5350% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it 5351% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting 5352% the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the 5353% \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that 5354% sequences like this: 5355% @end defun 5356% @tindex whatever 5357% @defun ... 5358% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the 5359% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of 5360% the previous defun. 5361% 5362% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We 5363% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph. 5364% 5365% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too. 5366% 5367% But wait, there is a catch there: 5368% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not 5369% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts 5370% of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual 5371% representation of the skip. 5372% 5373% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that 5374% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter). 5375% 5376\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname} 5377% 5378\newskip\whatsitskip 5379\newcount\whatsitpenalty 5380% 5381% ..., ready, GO: 5382% 5383\def\safewhatsit#1{\ifhmode 5384 #1% 5385 \else 5386 % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously. 5387 \whatsitskip = \lastskip 5388 \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}% 5389 \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty 5390 % 5391 % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a 5392 % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this 5393 % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a 5394 % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential 5395 % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed. 5396 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro 5397 \else 5398 \vskip-\whatsitskip 5399 \fi 5400 % 5401 #1% 5402 % 5403 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro 5404 % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and 5405 % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want 5406 % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various 5407 % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any 5408 % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example: 5409 % @deffn deffn-whatever 5410 % @vindex index-whatever 5411 % Description. 5412 % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit 5413 % and the "Description." paragraph. 5414 \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi 5415 \else 5416 % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip, 5417 % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item 5418 % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak. 5419 \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip 5420 \fi 5421\fi} 5422 5423% The index entry written in the file actually looks like 5424% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} 5425% or 5426% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic} 5427% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files 5428% containing these kinds of lines: 5429% \initial {c} 5430% before the first topic whose initial is c 5431% \entry {topic}{pagelist} 5432% for a topic that is used without subtopics 5433% \primary {topic} 5434% \entry {topic}{} 5435% for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics 5436% \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist} 5437% for each subtopic. 5438% \secondary {subtopic}{} 5439% for a subtopic with sub-subtopics 5440% \tertiary {subtopic}{subsubtopic}{pagelist} 5441% for each sub-subtopic. 5442 5443% Define the user-accessible indexing commands 5444% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex. 5445 5446\def\findex {\fnindex} 5447\def\kindex {\kyindex} 5448\def\cindex {\cpindex} 5449\def\vindex {\vrindex} 5450\def\tindex {\tpindex} 5451\def\pindex {\pgindex} 5452 5453% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. 5454 5455% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed. 5456% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered). 5457% 5458\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup 5459 \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}% 5460 % 5461 \smallfonts \rm 5462 \tolerance = 9500 5463 \plainfrenchspacing 5464 \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression. 5465 % 5466 % See comment in \requireopenindexfile. 5467 \def\indexname{#1}\ifx\indexname\indexisfl\def\indexname{f1}\fi 5468 % 5469 % See if the index file exists and is nonempty. 5470 \openin 1 \jobname.\indexname s 5471 \ifeof 1 5472 % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, 5473 % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the 5474 % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure 5475 % there is some text. 5476 \putwordIndexNonexistent 5477 \typeout{No file \jobname.\indexname s.}% 5478 \else 5479 % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof 5480 % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so 5481 % it can discover if there is anything in it. 5482 \read 1 to \thisline 5483 \ifeof 1 5484 \putwordIndexIsEmpty 5485 \else 5486 \expandafter\printindexzz\thisline\relax\relax\finish% 5487 \fi 5488 \fi 5489 \closein 1 5490\endgroup} 5491 5492% If the index file starts with a backslash, forgo reading the index 5493% file altogether. If somebody upgrades texinfo.tex they may still have 5494% old index files using \ as the escape character. Reading this would 5495% at best lead to typesetting garbage, at worst a TeX syntax error. 5496\def\printindexzz#1#2\finish{% 5497 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexescapeisbackslash\endcsname\relax 5498 \uccode`\~=`\\ \uppercase{\if\noexpand~}\noexpand#1 5499 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiskipindexfileswithbackslash\endcsname\relax 5500\errmessage{% 5501ERROR: A sorted index file in an obsolete format was skipped. 5502To fix this problem, please upgrade your version of 'texi2dvi' 5503or 'texi2pdf' to that at <https://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo>. 5504If you are using an old version of 'texindex' (part of the Texinfo 5505distribution), you may also need to upgrade to a newer version (at least 6.0). 5506You may be able to typeset the index if you run 5507'texindex \jobname.\indexname' yourself. 5508You could also try setting the 'txiindexescapeisbackslash' flag by 5509running a command like 5510'texi2dvi -t "@set txiindexescapeisbackslash" \jobname.texi'. If you do 5511this, Texinfo will try to use index files in the old format. 5512If you continue to have problems, deleting the index files and starting again 5513might help (with 'rm \jobname.?? \jobname.??s')% 5514}% 5515 \else 5516 (Skipped sorted index file in obsolete format) 5517 \fi 5518 \else 5519 \begindoublecolumns 5520 \input \jobname.\indexname s 5521 \enddoublecolumns 5522 \fi 5523 \else 5524 \begindoublecolumns 5525 \catcode`\\=0\relax 5526 % 5527 % Make @ an escape character to give macros a chance to work. This 5528 % should work because we (hopefully) don't otherwise use @ in index files. 5529 %\catcode`\@=12\relax 5530 \catcode`\@=0\relax 5531 \input \jobname.\indexname s 5532 \enddoublecolumns 5533 \fi 5534} 5535 5536% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. 5537% Change them to control the appearance of the index. 5538 5539{\catcode`\/=13 \catcode`\-=13 \catcode`\^=13 \catcode`\~=13 \catcode`\_=13 5540\catcode`\|=13 \catcode`\<=13 \catcode`\>=13 \catcode`\+=13 \catcode`\"=13 5541\catcode`\$=3 5542\gdef\initialglyphs{% 5543 % special control sequences used in the index sort key 5544 \let\indexlbrace\{% 5545 \let\indexrbrace\}% 5546 \let\indexatchar\@% 5547 \def\indexbackslash{\math{\backslash}}% 5548 % 5549 % Some changes for non-alphabetic characters. Using the glyphs from the 5550 % math fonts looks more consistent than the typewriter font used elsewhere 5551 % for these characters. 5552 \uccode`\~=`\\ \uppercase{\def~{\math{\backslash}}} 5553 % 5554 % In case @\ is used for backslash 5555 \uppercase{\let\\=~} 5556 % Can't get bold backslash so don't use bold forward slash 5557 \catcode`\/=13 5558 \def/{{\secrmnotbold \normalslash}}% 5559 \def-{{\normaldash\normaldash}}% en dash `--' 5560 \def^{{\chapbf \normalcaret}}% 5561 \def~{{\chapbf \normaltilde}}% 5562 \def\_{% 5563 \leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }% 5564 \def|{$\vert$}% 5565 \def<{$\less$}% 5566 \def>{$\gtr$}% 5567 \def+{$\normalplus$}% 5568}} 5569 5570\def\initial{% 5571 \bgroup 5572 \initialglyphs 5573 \initialx 5574} 5575 5576\def\initialx#1{% 5577 % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own. 5578 \removelastskip 5579 % 5580 % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus. 5581 % The glue before the bonus allows a little bit of space at the 5582 % bottom of a column to reduce an increase in inter-line spacing. 5583 \nobreak 5584 \vskip 0pt plus 5\baselineskip 5585 \penalty -300 5586 \vskip 0pt plus -5\baselineskip 5587 % 5588 % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of 5589 % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column 5590 % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch 5591 % we need before each entry, but it's better. 5592 % 5593 % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns. 5594 \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus 1\baselineskip 5595 \leftline{\secfonts \kern-0.05em \secbf #1}% 5596 % \secfonts is inside the argument of \leftline so that the change of 5597 % \baselineskip will not affect any glue inserted before the vbox that 5598 % \leftline creates. 5599 % Do our best not to break after the initial. 5600 \nobreak 5601 \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip 5602 \egroup % \initialglyphs 5603} 5604 5605\newdimen\entryrightmargin 5606\entryrightmargin=0pt 5607 5608% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and 5609% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index 5610% and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. 5611% 5612\def\entry{% 5613 \begingroup 5614 % 5615 % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't 5616 % affect previous text. 5617 \par 5618 % 5619 % No extra space above this paragraph. 5620 \parskip = 0in 5621 % 5622 % When reading the text of entry, convert explicit line breaks 5623 % from @* into spaces. The user might give these in long section 5624 % titles, for instance. 5625 \def\*{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}% 5626 \def\entrybreak{\hfil\break}% An undocumented command 5627 % 5628 % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter): 5629 \afterassignment\doentry 5630 \let\temp = 5631} 5632\def\entrybreak{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}% 5633\def\doentry{% 5634 % Save the text of the entry 5635 \global\setbox\boxA=\hbox\bgroup 5636 \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace. 5637 \noindent 5638 \aftergroup\finishentry 5639 % And now comes the text of the entry. 5640 % Not absorbing as a macro argument reduces the chance of problems 5641 % with catcodes occurring. 5642} 5643{\catcode`\@=11 5644\gdef\finishentry#1{% 5645 \egroup % end box A 5646 \dimen@ = \wd\boxA % Length of text of entry 5647 \global\setbox\boxA=\hbox\bgroup 5648 \unhbox\boxA 5649 % #1 is the page number. 5650 % 5651 % Get the width of the page numbers, and only use 5652 % leaders if they are present. 5653 \global\setbox\boxB = \hbox{#1}% 5654 \ifdim\wd\boxB = 0pt 5655 \null\nobreak\hfill\ % 5656 \else 5657 % 5658 \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number. 5659 % 5660 \ifpdforxetex 5661 \pdfgettoks#1.% 5662 \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable\the\toksA 5663 \else 5664 \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable #1% 5665 \fi 5666 \fi 5667 \egroup % end \boxA 5668 \ifdim\wd\boxB = 0pt 5669 \noindent\unhbox\boxA\par 5670 \nobreak 5671 \else\bgroup 5672 % We want the text of the entries to be aligned to the left, and the 5673 % page numbers to be aligned to the right. 5674 % 5675 \parindent = 0pt 5676 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fil 5677 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus -1fill 5678 \rightskip = 0pt plus -1fil 5679 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fill 5680 % Cause last line, which could consist of page numbers on their own 5681 % if the list of page numbers is long, to be aligned to the right. 5682 \parfillskip=0pt plus -1fill 5683 % 5684 \advance\rightskip by \entryrightmargin 5685 % Determine how far we can stretch into the margin. 5686 % This allows, e.g., "Appendix H GNU Free Documentation License" to 5687 % fit on one line in @letterpaper format. 5688 \ifdim\entryrightmargin>2.1em 5689 \dimen@i=2.1em 5690 \else 5691 \dimen@i=0em 5692 \fi 5693 \advance \parfillskip by 0pt minus 1\dimen@i 5694 % 5695 \dimen@ii = \hsize 5696 \advance\dimen@ii by -1\leftskip 5697 \advance\dimen@ii by -1\entryrightmargin 5698 \advance\dimen@ii by 1\dimen@i 5699 \ifdim\wd\boxA > \dimen@ii % If the entry doesn't fit in one line 5700 \ifdim\dimen@ > 0.8\dimen@ii % due to long index text 5701 % Try to split the text roughly evenly. \dimen@ will be the length of 5702 % the first line. 5703 \dimen@ = 0.7\dimen@ 5704 \dimen@ii = \hsize 5705 \ifnum\dimen@>\dimen@ii 5706 % If the entry is too long (for example, if it needs more than 5707 % two lines), use all the space in the first line. 5708 \dimen@ = \dimen@ii 5709 \fi 5710 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill % ragged right 5711 \advance \dimen@ by 1\rightskip 5712 \parshape = 2 0pt \dimen@ 0em \dimen@ii 5713 % Ideally we'd add a finite glue at the end of the first line only, 5714 % instead of using \parshape with explicit line lengths, but TeX 5715 % doesn't seem to provide a way to do such a thing. 5716 % 5717 % Indent all lines but the first one. 5718 \advance\leftskip by 1em 5719 \advance\parindent by -1em 5720 \fi\fi 5721 \indent % start paragraph 5722 \unhbox\boxA 5723 % 5724 % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines. 5725 \finalhyphendemerits = 0 5726 % 5727 % Word spacing - no stretch 5728 \spaceskip=\fontdimen2\font minus \fontdimen4\font 5729 % 5730 \linepenalty=1000 % Discourage line breaks. 5731 \hyphenpenalty=5000 % Discourage hyphenation. 5732 % 5733 \par % format the paragraph 5734 \egroup % The \vbox 5735 \fi 5736 \endgroup 5737}} 5738 5739\newskip\thinshrinkable 5740\skip\thinshrinkable=.15em minus .15em 5741 5742% Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em. 5743% The filll stretch here overpowers both the fil and fill stretch to push 5744% the page number to the right. 5745\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders 5746 \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1filll} 5747 5748 5749\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}} 5750 5751\def\secondary{\indententry{0.5cm}} 5752\def\tertiary{\indententry{1cm}} 5753 5754\def\indententry#1#2#3{% 5755 \bgroup 5756 \leftskip=#1 5757 \entry{#2}{#3}% 5758 \egroup 5759} 5760 5761% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes. 5762% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say, 5763% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself. 5764\catcode`\@=11 % private names 5765 5766\newbox\partialpage 5767\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize 5768 5769\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns 5770 % If not much space left on page, start a new page. 5771 \ifdim\pagetotal>0.8\vsize\vfill\eject\fi 5772 % 5773 % Grab any single-column material above us. 5774 \output = {% 5775 \savetopmark 5776 % 5777 \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{% 5778 % Unvbox the main output page. 5779 \unvbox\PAGE 5780 \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip 5781 }% 5782 }% 5783 \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage 5784 % 5785 % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages. 5786 \output = {\doublecolumnout}% 5787 % 5788 % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this 5789 % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 5790 % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple 5791 % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the 5792 % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place. 5793 % 5794 % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between 5795 % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it 5796 % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant 5797 % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt) 5798 % as it did when we hard-coded it. 5799 % 5800 % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we 5801 % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) 5802 % been clobbered. 5803 % 5804 \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize 5805 \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize 5806 \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2 5807 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize 5808 % 5809 % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal 5810 % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the 5811 % previous page. 5812 \advance\vsize by -\ht\partialpage 5813 \vsize = 2\vsize 5814 % 5815 % For the benefit of balancing columns 5816 \advance\baselineskip by 0pt plus 0.5pt 5817} 5818 5819% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except 5820% the last, which is done by \balancecolumns. 5821% 5822\def\doublecolumnout{% 5823 % 5824 \savetopmark 5825 \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth 5826 \dimen@ = \vsize 5827 \divide\dimen@ by 2 5828 % 5829 % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right. 5830 \setbox0=\vsplit\PAGE to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit\PAGE to\dimen@ 5831 \global\advance\vsize by 2\ht\partialpage 5832 \onepageout\pagesofar % empty except for the first time we are called 5833 \unvbox\PAGE 5834 \penalty\outputpenalty 5835} 5836% 5837% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material, 5838% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2. 5839\def\pagesofar{% 5840 \unvbox\partialpage 5841 % 5842 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize 5843 \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize 5844 \hbox to\txipagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% 5845} 5846 5847 5848% Finished with double columns. 5849\def\enddoublecolumns{% 5850 % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised 5851 % _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the 5852 % following situation: 5853 % 5854 % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry. 5855 % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no 5856 % break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last 5857 % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not 5858 % fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following 5859 % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject 5860 % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output 5861 % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last 5862 % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which 5863 % is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with 5864 % the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as 5865 % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page 5866 % break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the 5867 % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page 5868 % goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final 5869 % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after 5870 % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns 5871 % and the final section into the vbox of \txipageheight (see 5872 % \pagebody), causing an overfull box. 5873 % 5874 % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the 5875 % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281). 5876 \penalty0 5877 % 5878 \output = {% 5879 % Split the last of the double-column material. 5880 \savetopmark 5881 \balancecolumns 5882 }% 5883 \eject % call the \output just set 5884 \ifdim\pagetotal=0pt 5885 % Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not 5886 % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal 5887 % definition right away. 5888 \global\output=\expandafter{\the\defaultoutput} 5889 % 5890 \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns 5891 % Leave the double-column material on the current page, no automatic 5892 % page break. 5893 \box\balancedcolumns 5894 % 5895 % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted 5896 % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column 5897 % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize. 5898 \global\vsize = \txipageheight % 5899 \pagegoal = \txipageheight % 5900 \else 5901 % We had some left-over material. This might happen when \doublecolumnout 5902 % is called in \balancecolumns. Try again. 5903 \expandafter\enddoublecolumns 5904 \fi 5905} 5906\newbox\balancedcolumns 5907\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{shouldnt see this}% 5908% 5909% Only called for the last of the double column material. \doublecolumnout 5910% does the others. 5911\def\balancecolumns{% 5912 \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox\PAGE}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120. 5913 \dimen@ = \ht0 5914 \ifdim\dimen@<7\baselineskip 5915 % Don't split a short final column in two. 5916 \setbox2=\vbox{}% 5917 \global\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{\pagesofar}% 5918 \else 5919 % double the leading vertical space 5920 \advance\dimen@ by \topskip 5921 \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip 5922 \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to 5923 \dimen@ii = \dimen@ 5924 \splittopskip = \topskip 5925 % Loop until left column is at least as high as the right column. 5926 {% 5927 \vbadness = 10000 5928 \loop 5929 \global\setbox3 = \copy0 5930 \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@ 5931 \ifdim\ht1<\ht3 5932 \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt 5933 \repeat 5934 }% 5935 % Now the left column is in box 1, and the right column in box 3. 5936 % 5937 % Check whether the left column has come out higher than the page itself. 5938 % (Note that we have doubled \vsize for the double columns, so 5939 % the actual height of the page is 0.5\vsize). 5940 \ifdim2\ht1>\vsize 5941 % It appears that we have been called upon to balance too much material. 5942 % Output some of it with \doublecolumnout, leaving the rest on the page. 5943 \setbox\PAGE=\box0 5944 \doublecolumnout 5945 \else 5946 % Compare the heights of the two columns. 5947 \ifdim4\ht1>5\ht3 5948 % Column heights are too different, so don't make their bottoms 5949 % flush with each other. 5950 \setbox2=\vbox to \ht1 {\unvbox3\vfill}% 5951 \setbox0=\vbox to \ht1 {\unvbox1\vfill}% 5952 \else 5953 % Make column bottoms flush with each other. 5954 \setbox2=\vbox to\ht1{\unvbox3\unskip}% 5955 \setbox0=\vbox to\ht1{\unvbox1\unskip}% 5956 \fi 5957 \global\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{\pagesofar}% 5958 \fi 5959 \fi 5960 % 5961} 5962\catcode`\@ = \other 5963 5964 5965\message{sectioning,} 5966% Chapters, sections, etc. 5967 5968% Let's start with @part. 5969\outer\parseargdef\part{\partzzz{#1}} 5970\def\partzzz#1{% 5971 \chapoddpage 5972 \null 5973 \vskip.3\vsize % move it down on the page a bit 5974 \begingroup 5975 \noindent \titlefonts\rm #1\par % the text 5976 \let\lastnode=\empty % no node to associate with 5977 \writetocentry{part}{#1}{}% but put it in the toc 5978 \headingsoff % no headline or footline on the part page 5979 % This outputs a mark at the end of the page that clears \thischapter 5980 % and \thissection, as is done in \startcontents. 5981 \let\pchapsepmacro\relax 5982 \chapmacro{}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% 5983 \chapoddpage 5984 \endgroup 5985} 5986 5987% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron. But we count the unnumbered 5988% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf 5989% outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter 5990% numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000 5991% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.) 5992\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000 5993\newcount\chapno 5994\newcount\secno \secno=0 5995\newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0 5996\newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0 5997 5998% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... 5999\newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@ 6000% 6001% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} 6002% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple 6003% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual 6004% letter in the expansion, not just typeset. 6005% 6006\def\appendixletter{% 6007 \ifnum\appendixno=`A A% 6008 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B% 6009 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C% 6010 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D% 6011 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E% 6012 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F% 6013 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G% 6014 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H% 6015 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I% 6016 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J% 6017 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K% 6018 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L% 6019 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M% 6020 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N% 6021 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O% 6022 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P% 6023 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q% 6024 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R% 6025 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S% 6026 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T% 6027 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U% 6028 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V% 6029 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W% 6030 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X% 6031 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y% 6032 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z% 6033 % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is 6034 % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not 6035 % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out 6036 % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it. 6037 \else\char\the\appendixno 6038 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 6039 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} 6040 6041% Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number 6042% and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use 6043% these. @section does likewise. 6044\def\thischapter{} 6045\def\thischapternum{} 6046\def\thischaptername{} 6047\def\thissection{} 6048\def\thissectionnum{} 6049\def\thissectionname{} 6050 6051\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level 6052\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count 6053 6054% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc. 6055\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1} 6056 6057% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc. 6058\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1} 6059 6060% we only have subsub. 6061\chardef\maxseclevel = 3 6062% 6063% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too. 6064% To achieve this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in: 6065\chardef\unnlevel = \maxseclevel 6066% 6067% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not: 6068% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored. 6069\def\chapheadtype{N} 6070 6071% Choose a heading macro 6072% #1 is heading type 6073% #2 is heading level 6074% #3 is text for heading 6075\def\genhead#1#2#3{% 6076 % Compute the abs. sec. level: 6077 \absseclevel=#2 6078 \advance\absseclevel by \secbase 6079 % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range: 6080 \ifnum \absseclevel < 0 6081 \absseclevel = 0 6082 \else 6083 \ifnum \absseclevel > 3 6084 \absseclevel = 3 6085 \fi 6086 \fi 6087 % The heading type: 6088 \def\headtype{#1}% 6089 \if \headtype U% 6090 \ifnum \absseclevel < \unnlevel 6091 \chardef\unnlevel = \absseclevel 6092 \fi 6093 \else 6094 % Check for appendix sections: 6095 \ifnum \absseclevel = 0 6096 \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}% 6097 \else 6098 \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N% 6099 \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}% 6100 \fi\fi 6101 \fi 6102 % Check for numbered within unnumbered: 6103 \ifnum \absseclevel > \unnlevel 6104 \def\headtype{U}% 6105 \else 6106 \chardef\unnlevel = 3 6107 \fi 6108 \fi 6109 % Now print the heading: 6110 \if \headtype U% 6111 \ifcase\absseclevel 6112 \unnumberedzzz{#3}% 6113 \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}% 6114 \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}% 6115 \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% 6116 \fi 6117 \else 6118 \if \headtype A% 6119 \ifcase\absseclevel 6120 \appendixzzz{#3}% 6121 \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}% 6122 \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}% 6123 \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}% 6124 \fi 6125 \else 6126 \ifcase\absseclevel 6127 \chapterzzz{#3}% 6128 \or \seczzz{#3}% 6129 \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}% 6130 \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% 6131 \fi 6132 \fi 6133 \fi 6134 \suppressfirstparagraphindent 6135} 6136 6137% an interface: 6138\def\numhead{\genhead N} 6139\def\apphead{\genhead A} 6140\def\unnmhead{\genhead U} 6141 6142% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset 6143% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero. 6144% 6145% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers 6146% (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty. 6147\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty 6148% 6149\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz 6150\def\chapterzzz#1{% 6151 % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such 6152 % as an @include file. 6153 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 6154 \global\advance\chapno by 1 6155 % 6156 % Used for \float. 6157 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}% 6158 \resetallfloatnos 6159 % 6160 % \putwordChapter can contain complex things in translations. 6161 \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordChapter}% 6162 \message{\the\toks0 \space \the\chapno}% 6163 % 6164 % Write the actual heading. 6165 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}% 6166 % 6167 % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter. 6168 \global\let\section = \numberedsec 6169 \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec 6170 \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec 6171} 6172 6173\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally calls appendixzzz 6174% 6175\def\appendixzzz#1{% 6176 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 6177 \global\advance\appendixno by 1 6178 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}% 6179 \resetallfloatnos 6180 % 6181 % \putwordAppendix can contain complex things in translations. 6182 \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordAppendix}% 6183 \message{\the\toks0 \space \appendixletter}% 6184 % 6185 \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}% 6186 % 6187 \global\let\section = \appendixsec 6188 \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec 6189 \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec 6190} 6191 6192% normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz: 6193\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} 6194\def\unnumberedzzz#1{% 6195 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 6196 \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1 6197 % 6198 % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures. 6199 \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty 6200 \resetallfloatnos 6201 % 6202 % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the 6203 % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX 6204 % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX 6205 % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant 6206 % to be executed, not expanded). 6207 % 6208 % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear 6209 % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use 6210 % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once, 6211 % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for 6212 % the toc entries.) 6213 \toks0 = {#1}% 6214 \message{(\the\toks0)}% 6215 % 6216 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}% 6217 % 6218 \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec 6219 \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec 6220 \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec 6221} 6222 6223% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered. 6224\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{% 6225 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters 6226 \unnmhead0{#1}% 6227 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax 6228} 6229 6230% @top is like @unnumbered. 6231\let\top\unnumbered 6232 6233% Sections. 6234% 6235\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz 6236\def\seczzz#1{% 6237 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 6238 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}% 6239} 6240 6241% normally calls appendixsectionzzz: 6242\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} 6243\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{% 6244 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 6245 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}% 6246} 6247\let\appendixsec\appendixsection 6248 6249% normally calls unnumberedseczzz: 6250\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} 6251\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{% 6252 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 6253 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}% 6254} 6255 6256% Subsections. 6257% 6258% normally calls numberedsubseczzz: 6259\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} 6260\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{% 6261 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 6262 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 6263} 6264 6265% normally calls appendixsubseczzz: 6266\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} 6267\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{% 6268 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 6269 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}% 6270 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 6271} 6272 6273% normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz: 6274\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} 6275\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{% 6276 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 6277 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}% 6278 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 6279} 6280 6281% Subsubsections. 6282% 6283% normally numberedsubsubseczzz: 6284\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} 6285\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{% 6286 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 6287 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}% 6288 {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 6289} 6290 6291% normally appendixsubsubseczzz: 6292\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} 6293\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{% 6294 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 6295 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}% 6296 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 6297} 6298 6299% normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz: 6300\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} 6301\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{% 6302 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 6303 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}% 6304 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 6305} 6306 6307% These macros control what the section commands do, according 6308% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered). 6309% Define them by default for a numbered chapter. 6310\let\section = \numberedsec 6311\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec 6312\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec 6313 6314% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading 6315 6316\def\majorheading{% 6317 {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }% 6318 \parsearg\chapheadingzzz 6319} 6320 6321\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz} 6322\def\chapheadingzzz#1{% 6323 \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}% 6324 \nobreak\bigskip \nobreak 6325 \suppressfirstparagraphindent 6326} 6327 6328% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading. 6329\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 6330 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 6331\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 6332 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 6333\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 6334 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 6335 6336% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only 6337% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it), 6338% given all the information in convenient, parsed form. 6339 6340% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative) 6341\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi} 6342 6343% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed) 6344\newskip\chapheadingskip 6345 6346% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it. 6347\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} 6348 6349% Start a new page 6350\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} 6351 6352% \chapoddpage - start on an odd page for a new chapter 6353% Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will 6354% get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't 6355% care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page. 6356\def\chapoddpage{% 6357 \chappager 6358 \ifodd\pageno \else 6359 \begingroup 6360 \headingsoff 6361 \null 6362 \chappager 6363 \endgroup 6364 \fi 6365} 6366 6367\parseargdef\setchapternewpage{\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} 6368 6369\def\CHAPPAGoff{% 6370\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 6371\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak 6372\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsinglechapoff}} 6373 6374\def\CHAPPAGon{% 6375\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 6376\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager 6377\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} 6378 6379\def\CHAPPAGodd{% 6380\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 6381\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage 6382\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}} 6383 6384\CHAPPAGon 6385 6386% \chapmacro - Chapter opening. 6387% 6388% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, 6389% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number. 6390% Not used for @heading series. 6391% 6392% To test against our argument. 6393\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing} 6394\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix} 6395\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc} 6396% 6397\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{% 6398 \expandafter\ifx\thisenv\titlepage\else 6399 \checkenv{}% chapters, etc., should not start inside an environment. 6400 \fi 6401 % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). 6402 \let\prevchapterdefs=\currentchapterdefs 6403 \let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs 6404 \gdef\currentsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% 6405 \gdef\thissection{}}% 6406 % 6407 \def\temptype{#2}% 6408 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6409 \gdef\currentchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% 6410 \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}% 6411 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6412 \gdef\currentchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% 6413 \gdef\thischapter{}}% 6414 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6415 \toks0={#1}% 6416 \xdef\currentchapterdefs{% 6417 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% 6418 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}% 6419 % \noexpand\putwordAppendix avoids expanding indigestible 6420 % commands in some of the translations. 6421 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordAppendix{} 6422 \noexpand\thischapternum: 6423 \noexpand\thischaptername}% 6424 }% 6425 \else 6426 \toks0={#1}% 6427 \xdef\currentchapterdefs{% 6428 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% 6429 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}% 6430 % \noexpand\putwordChapter avoids expanding indigestible 6431 % commands in some of the translations. 6432 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordChapter{} 6433 \noexpand\thischapternum: 6434 \noexpand\thischaptername}% 6435 }% 6436 \fi\fi\fi 6437 % 6438 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of 6439 % the preceding space. 6440 \safewhatsit\domark 6441 % 6442 % Insert the chapter heading break. 6443 \pchapsepmacro 6444 % 6445 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points 6446 % between here and the heading. 6447 \let\prevchapterdefs=\currentchapterdefs 6448 \let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs 6449 \domark 6450 % 6451 {% 6452 \chapfonts \rm 6453 \let\footnote=\errfootnoteheading % give better error message 6454 % 6455 % Have to define \currentsection before calling \donoderef, because the 6456 % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called 6457 % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon. 6458 \gdef\currentsection{#1}% 6459 % 6460 % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix 6461 % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''. 6462 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6463 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 6464 \def\toctype{unnchap}% 6465 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6466 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry 6467 \def\toctype{omit}% 6468 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6469 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}% 6470 \def\toctype{app}% 6471 \else 6472 \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}% 6473 \def\toctype{numchap}% 6474 \fi\fi\fi 6475 % 6476 % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the 6477 % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc 6478 % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty. 6479 \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}% 6480 % 6481 % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make 6482 % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has 6483 % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the 6484 % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not 6485 % being visible, for instance under high magnification. 6486 \donoderef{#2}% 6487 % 6488 % Typeset the actual heading. 6489 \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue. 6490 \vbox{\raggedtitlesettings \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe 6491 \unhbox0 #1\par}% 6492 }% 6493 \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title 6494 \nobreak 6495} 6496 6497% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered. 6498\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax 6499\def\centerparameters{% 6500 \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip 6501 \leftskip = \rightskip 6502 \parfillskip = 0pt 6503} 6504 6505 6506% Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and 6507% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing. 6508% 6509\newskip\secheadingskip 6510\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}} 6511 6512% Subsection titles. 6513\newskip\subsecheadingskip 6514\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}} 6515 6516% Subsubsection titles. 6517\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip} 6518\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak} 6519 6520 6521% Print any size, any type, section title. 6522% 6523% #1 is the text of the title, 6524% #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), 6525% #3 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), 6526% #4 is the section number. 6527% 6528\def\seckeyword{sec} 6529% 6530\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{% 6531 {% 6532 \def\sectionlevel{#2}% 6533 \def\temptype{#3}% 6534 % 6535 % It is ok for the @heading series commands to appear inside an 6536 % environment (it's been historically allowed, though the logic is 6537 % dubious), but not the others. 6538 \ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword\else 6539 \checkenv{}% non-@*heading should not be in an environment. 6540 \fi 6541 \let\footnote=\errfootnoteheading 6542 % 6543 % Switch to the right set of fonts. 6544 \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm 6545 % 6546 % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). 6547 \let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs 6548 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6549 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 6550 \gdef\currentsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% 6551 \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}% 6552 \fi 6553 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6554 % Don't redefine \thissection. 6555 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6556 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 6557 \toks0={#1}% 6558 \xdef\currentsectiondefs{% 6559 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% 6560 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% 6561 % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible 6562 % commands in some of the translations. 6563 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{} 6564 \noexpand\thissectionnum: 6565 \noexpand\thissectionname}% 6566 }% 6567 \fi 6568 \else 6569 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 6570 \toks0={#1}% 6571 \xdef\currentsectiondefs{% 6572 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% 6573 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% 6574 % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible 6575 % commands in some of the translations. 6576 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{} 6577 \noexpand\thissectionnum: 6578 \noexpand\thissectionname}% 6579 }% 6580 \fi 6581 \fi\fi\fi 6582 % 6583 % Go into vertical mode. Usually we'll already be there, but we 6584 % don't want the following whatsit to end up in a preceding paragraph 6585 % if the document didn't happen to have a blank line. 6586 \par 6587 % 6588 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of 6589 % the preceding space. 6590 \safewhatsit\domark 6591 % 6592 % Insert space above the heading. 6593 \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname 6594 % 6595 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points 6596 % between here and the heading. 6597 \global\let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs 6598 \domark 6599 % 6600 % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number. 6601 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6602 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 6603 \def\toctype{unn}% 6604 \gdef\currentsection{#1}% 6605 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6606 % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc, 6607 % and don't redefine \currentsection. 6608 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 6609 \def\toctype{omit}% 6610 \let\sectionlevel=\empty 6611 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6612 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% 6613 \def\toctype{app}% 6614 \gdef\currentsection{#1}% 6615 \else 6616 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% 6617 \def\toctype{num}% 6618 \gdef\currentsection{#1}% 6619 \fi\fi\fi 6620 % 6621 % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro. 6622 \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}% 6623 % 6624 % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex). 6625 % Again, see comments in \chapmacro. 6626 \donoderef{#3}% 6627 % 6628 % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed. 6629 % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be 6630 % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the 6631 % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that 6632 % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the 6633 % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000. 6634 \nobreak 6635 % 6636 % Output the actual section heading. 6637 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright 6638 \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number 6639 \unhbox0 #1}% 6640 }% 6641 % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it. 6642 % Don't allow stretch, though. 6643 \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname 6644 % 6645 % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it 6646 % was followed by glue. 6647 \nobreak 6648 % 6649 % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that 6650 % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a 6651 % discardable item.) However, when a paragraph is not started next 6652 % (\startdefun, \cartouche, \center, etc.), this needs to be wiped out 6653 % or the negative glue will cause weirdly wrong output, typically 6654 % obscuring the section heading with something else. 6655 \vskip-\parskip 6656 % 6657 % This is so the last item on the main vertical list is a known 6658 % \penalty > 10000, so \startdefun, etc., can recognize the situation 6659 % and do the needful. 6660 \penalty 10001 6661} 6662 6663 6664\message{toc,} 6665% Table of contents. 6666\newwrite\tocfile 6667 6668% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary. 6669% Called from @chapter, etc. 6670% 6671% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno} 6672% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional 6673% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually 6674% read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the 6675% destination to jump to. 6676% 6677% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or 6678% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document. 6679% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the 6680% table of contents chapter openings themselves. 6681% 6682\newif\iftocfileopened 6683\def\omitkeyword{omit}% 6684% 6685\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{% 6686 \edef\writetoctype{#1}% 6687 \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else 6688 \iftocfileopened\else 6689 \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc 6690 \global\tocfileopenedtrue 6691 \fi 6692 % 6693 \iflinks 6694 {\atdummies 6695 \edef\temp{% 6696 \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}% 6697 \temp 6698 }% 6699 \fi 6700 \fi 6701 % 6702 % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're 6703 % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't 6704 % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered 6705 % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first 6706 % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named 6707 % `1', and two named `2'. 6708 \ifpdforxetex 6709 \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue 6710 \fi 6711} 6712 6713 6714% These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman 6715% fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant 6716% with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file. 6717% 6718\def\activecatcodes{% 6719 \catcode`\"=\active 6720 \catcode`\$=\active 6721 \catcode`\<=\active 6722 \catcode`\>=\active 6723 \catcode`\\=\active 6724 \catcode`\^=\active 6725 \catcode`\_=\active 6726 \catcode`\|=\active 6727 \catcode`\~=\active 6728} 6729 6730 6731% Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input. 6732\def\readtocfile{% 6733 \setupdatafile 6734 \activecatcodes 6735 \input \tocreadfilename 6736} 6737 6738\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in 6739\newcount\savepageno 6740\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1 6741 6742% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile. 6743% 6744\def\startcontents#1{% 6745 % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should 6746 % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. 6747 \contentsalignmacro 6748 \immediate\closeout\tocfile 6749 % 6750 % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. 6751 % It is abundantly clear what they are. 6752 \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% 6753 % 6754 \savepageno = \pageno 6755 \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly. 6756 \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. 6757 \entryrightmargin=\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. 6758 % 6759 % Roman numerals for page numbers. 6760 \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi 6761 \def\thistitle{}% no title in double-sided headings 6762 % Record where the Roman numerals started. 6763 \ifnum\romancount=0 \global\romancount=\pagecount \fi 6764} 6765 6766% redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on 6767% \jobname.toc even if this is redefined. 6768% 6769\def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc} 6770 6771% Normal (long) toc. 6772% 6773\def\contents{% 6774 \startcontents{\putwordTOC}% 6775 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space 6776 \ifeof 1 \else 6777 \readtocfile 6778 \fi 6779 \vfill \eject 6780 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect 6781 \ifeof 1 \else 6782 \pdfmakeoutlines 6783 \fi 6784 \closein 1 6785 \endgroup 6786 \contentsendroman 6787} 6788 6789% And just the chapters. 6790\def\summarycontents{% 6791 \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}% 6792 % 6793 \let\partentry = \shortpartentry 6794 \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry 6795 \let\appentry = \shortchapentry 6796 \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry 6797 % We want a true roman here for the page numbers. 6798 \secfonts 6799 \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf 6800 \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt 6801 \rm 6802 \hyphenpenalty = 10000 6803 \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little. 6804 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{} 6805 \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry 6806 \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry 6807 \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6808 \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6809 \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6810 \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6811 \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6812 \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6813 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space 6814 \ifeof 1 \else 6815 \readtocfile 6816 \fi 6817 \closein 1 6818 \vfill \eject 6819 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect 6820 \endgroup 6821 \contentsendroman 6822} 6823\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents 6824 6825% Get ready to use Arabic numerals again 6826\def\contentsendroman{% 6827 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno 6828 \global\pageno = \savepageno 6829 % 6830 % If \romancount > \arabiccount, the contents are at the end of the 6831 % document. Otherwise, advance where the Arabic numerals start for 6832 % the page numbers. 6833 \ifnum\romancount>\arabiccount\else\global\arabiccount=\pagecount\fi 6834} 6835 6836% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents. 6837% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter. 6838% 6839\def\shortchaplabel#1{% 6840 % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the 6841 % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts. 6842 % But use \hss just in case. 6843 % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after 6844 % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.) 6845 % 6846 % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange 6847 % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and 6848 % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10 6849 % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters 6850 % there are before deciding ... 6851 \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}% 6852} 6853 6854% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents. 6855% The first argument is the chapter or section name. 6856% The last argument is the page number. 6857% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ... 6858 6859% Parts, in the main contents. Replace the part number, which doesn't 6860% exist, with an empty box. Let's hope all the numbers have the same width. 6861% Also ignore the page number, which is conventionally not printed. 6862\def\numeralbox{\setbox0=\hbox{8}\hbox to \wd0{\hfil}} 6863\def\partentry#1#2#3#4{% 6864 % Add stretch and a bonus for breaking the page before the part heading. 6865 % This reduces the chance of the page being broken immediately after the 6866 % part heading, before a following chapter heading. 6867 \vskip 0pt plus 5\baselineskip 6868 \penalty-300 6869 \vskip 0pt plus -5\baselineskip 6870 \dochapentry{\numeralbox\labelspace#1}{}% 6871} 6872% 6873% Parts, in the short toc. 6874\def\shortpartentry#1#2#3#4{% 6875 \penalty-300 6876 \vskip.5\baselineskip plus.15\baselineskip minus.1\baselineskip 6877 \shortchapentry{{\bf #1}}{\numeralbox}{}{}% 6878} 6879 6880% Chapters, in the main contents. 6881\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6882 6883% Chapters, in the short toc. 6884% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings. 6885\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{% 6886 \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}% 6887} 6888 6889% Appendices, in the main contents. 6890% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box. 6891% 6892\def\appendixbox#1{% 6893 % We use M since it's probably the widest letter. 6894 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}% 6895 \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}} 6896% 6897\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\hskip.7em#1}{#4}} 6898 6899% Unnumbered chapters. 6900\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}} 6901\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}} 6902 6903% Sections. 6904\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6905\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry 6906\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}} 6907 6908% Subsections. 6909\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6910\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry 6911\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}} 6912 6913% And subsubsections. 6914\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6915\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry 6916\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}} 6917 6918% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels. 6919% Same as \defaultparindent. 6920\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt 6921 6922% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the 6923% page number. 6924% 6925% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters 6926% if at all possible; hence the \penalty. 6927\def\dochapentry#1#2{% 6928 \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip 6929 \begingroup 6930 % Move the page numbers slightly to the right 6931 \advance\entryrightmargin by -0.05em 6932 \chapentryfonts 6933 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 6934 \endgroup 6935 \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip 6936} 6937 6938\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup 6939 \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent 6940 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 6941\endgroup} 6942 6943\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup 6944 \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent 6945 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 6946\endgroup} 6947 6948\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup 6949 \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent 6950 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 6951\endgroup} 6952 6953% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries. 6954\let\tocentry = \entry 6955 6956% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title. 6957\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax} 6958 6959\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}} 6960\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}} 6961 6962\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm} 6963\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts} 6964\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts} 6965\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts} 6966 6967 6968\message{environments,} 6969% @foo ... @end foo. 6970 6971% @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw TeX temporarily. 6972% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works. 6973% But \@ or @@ will get a plain @ character. 6974 6975\envdef\tex{% 6976 \setregularquotes 6977 \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 6978 \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 6979 \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie 6980 \catcode `\%=14 6981 \catcode `\+=\other 6982 \catcode `\"=\other 6983 \catcode `\|=\other 6984 \catcode `\<=\other 6985 \catcode `\>=\other 6986 \catcode `\`=\other 6987 \catcode `\'=\other 6988 % 6989 % ' is active in math mode (mathcode"8000). So reset it, and all our 6990 % other math active characters (just in case), to plain's definitions. 6991 \mathactive 6992 % 6993 % Inverse of the list at the beginning of the file. 6994 \let\b=\ptexb 6995 \let\bullet=\ptexbullet 6996 \let\c=\ptexc 6997 \let\,=\ptexcomma 6998 \let\.=\ptexdot 6999 \let\dots=\ptexdots 7000 \let\equiv=\ptexequiv 7001 \let\!=\ptexexclam 7002 \let\i=\ptexi 7003 \let\indent=\ptexindent 7004 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent 7005 \let\{=\ptexlbrace 7006 \let\+=\tabalign 7007 \let\}=\ptexrbrace 7008 \let\/=\ptexslash 7009 \let\sp=\ptexsp 7010 \let\*=\ptexstar 7011 %\let\sup=\ptexsup % do not redefine, we want @sup to work in math mode 7012 \let\t=\ptext 7013 \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop % we've made it outer 7014 \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing 7015 % 7016 \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}% 7017 \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}% 7018 \def\@{@}% 7019} 7020% There is no need to define \Etex. 7021 7022% Define @lisp ... @end lisp. 7023% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things, 7024% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous). 7025 7026% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp. 7027\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in 7028 7029% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other 7030% such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't 7031% have any width. 7032\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf} 7033 7034% This space is always present above and below environments. 7035\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt 7036 7037% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here 7038% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip 7039% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the 7040% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip. 7041% 7042\def\aboveenvbreak{{% 7043 % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and 7044 % \sectionheading, q.v. 7045 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else 7046 \advance\envskipamount by \parskip 7047 \endgraf 7048 \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount 7049 \removelastskip 7050 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 7051 % Penalize breaking before the environment, because preceding text 7052 % often leads into it. 7053 \penalty100 7054 \fi 7055 \vskip\envskipamount 7056 \fi 7057 \fi 7058}} 7059 7060\def\afterenvbreak{{% 7061 % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and 7062 % \sectionheading, q.v. 7063 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else 7064 \advance\envskipamount by \parskip 7065 \endgraf 7066 \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount 7067 \removelastskip 7068 % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak 7069 % or better ... 7070 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi 7071 \vskip\envskipamount 7072 \fi 7073 \fi 7074}} 7075 7076% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will 7077% also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again. 7078\let\nonarrowing=\relax 7079 7080% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around 7081% environment contents. 7082 7083% 7084\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth 7085\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}} 7086\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}} 7087\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}} 7088\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip 7089 \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr 7090 \hskip\rskip}} 7091\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip 7092 \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr 7093 \hskip\rskip}} 7094% 7095\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip 7096 7097% only require the font if @cartouche is actually used 7098\def\cartouchefontdefs{% 7099 \font\circle=lcircle10\relax 7100 \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle 7101} 7102\newdimen\circthick 7103\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner 7104\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip 7105 7106 7107\envdef\cartouche{% 7108 \cartouchefontdefs 7109 \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph. 7110 \startsavinginserts 7111 \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip 7112 \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*. 7113 \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip 7114 \advance\cartinner by-\rskip 7115 \cartouter=\hsize 7116 \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either 7117 % side, and for 6pt waste from 7118 % each corner char, and rule thickness 7119 \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip 7120 % 7121 % If this cartouche directly follows a sectioning command, we need the 7122 % \parskip glue (backspaced over by default) or the cartouche can 7123 % collide with the section heading. 7124 \ifnum\lastpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \penalty\lastpenalty \fi 7125 % 7126 \setbox\groupbox=\vbox\bgroup 7127 \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt 7128 \carttop 7129 \hbox\bgroup 7130 \hskip\lskip 7131 \vrule\kern3pt 7132 \vbox\bgroup 7133 \kern3pt 7134 \hsize=\cartinner 7135 \baselineskip=\normbskip 7136 \lineskip=\normlskip 7137 \parskip=\normpskip 7138 \vskip -\parskip 7139 \comment % For explanation, see the end of def\group. 7140} 7141\def\Ecartouche{% 7142 \ifhmode\par\fi 7143 \kern3pt 7144 \egroup 7145 \kern3pt\vrule 7146 \hskip\rskip 7147 \egroup 7148 \cartbot 7149 \egroup 7150 \addgroupbox 7151 \checkinserts 7152} 7153 7154 7155% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants, 7156% inside a group. 7157\newdimen\nonfillparindent 7158\def\nonfillstart{% 7159 \aboveenvbreak 7160 \ifdim\hfuzz < 12pt \hfuzz = 12pt \fi % Don't be fussy 7161 \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens. 7162 \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines 7163 \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output 7164 \parskip = 0pt 7165 % Turn off paragraph indentation but redefine \indent to emulate 7166 % the normal \indent. 7167 \nonfillparindent=\parindent 7168 \parindent = 0pt 7169 \let\indent\nonfillindent 7170 % 7171 \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes 7172 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 7173 \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing 7174 \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing 7175 \else 7176 \let\nonarrowing = \relax 7177 \fi 7178 \let\exdent=\nofillexdent 7179} 7180 7181\begingroup 7182\obeyspaces 7183% We want to swallow spaces (but not other tokens) after the fake 7184% @indent in our nonfill-environments, where spaces are normally 7185% active and set to @tie, resulting in them not being ignored after 7186% @indent. 7187\gdef\nonfillindent{\futurelet\temp\nonfillindentcheck}% 7188\gdef\nonfillindentcheck{% 7189\ifx\temp % 7190\expandafter\nonfillindentgobble% 7191\else% 7192\leavevmode\nonfillindentbox% 7193\fi% 7194}% 7195\endgroup 7196\def\nonfillindentgobble#1{\nonfillindent} 7197\def\nonfillindentbox{\hbox to \nonfillparindent{\hss}} 7198 7199% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small. 7200% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall. 7201% This affects the following displayed environments: 7202% @example, @display, @format, @lisp, @verbatim 7203% 7204\def\smallword{small} 7205\def\nosmallword{nosmall} 7206\let\SETdispenvsize\relax 7207\def\setnormaldispenv{% 7208 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword 7209 % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank 7210 % line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but 7211 % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient 7212 % to change the fonts afterward. 7213 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi 7214 \smallexamplefonts \rm 7215 \fi 7216} 7217\def\setsmalldispenv{% 7218 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword 7219 \else 7220 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi 7221 \smallexamplefonts \rm 7222 \fi 7223} 7224 7225% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo. 7226% Let's do it in one command. #1 is the env name, #2 the definition. 7227\def\makedispenvdef#1#2{% 7228 \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}% 7229 \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}% 7230 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak 7231 \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak 7232} 7233 7234% Define two environment synonyms (#1 and #2) for an environment. 7235\def\maketwodispenvdef#1#2#3{% 7236 \makedispenvdef{#1}{#3}% 7237 \makedispenvdef{#2}{#3}% 7238} 7239% 7240% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; 7241% @example: same as @lisp. 7242% 7243% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts. 7244% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. 7245% 7246\maketwodispenvdef{lisp}{example}{% 7247 \nonfillstart 7248 \tt\setcodequotes 7249 \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special. 7250 \parsearg\gobble 7251} 7252% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font. 7253% 7254\makedispenvdef{display}{% 7255 \nonfillstart 7256 \gobble 7257} 7258 7259% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins. 7260% 7261\makedispenvdef{format}{% 7262 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7263 \nonfillstart 7264 \gobble 7265} 7266 7267% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize. 7268\envdef\flushleft{% 7269 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7270 \nonfillstart 7271 \gobble 7272} 7273\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak 7274 7275% @flushright. 7276% 7277\envdef\flushright{% 7278 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7279 \nonfillstart 7280 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill\relax 7281 \gobble 7282} 7283\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak 7284 7285 7286% @raggedright does more-or-less normal line breaking but no right 7287% justification. From plain.tex. 7288\envdef\raggedright{% 7289 \rightskip0pt plus2.4em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em\relax 7290} 7291\let\Eraggedright\par 7292 7293\envdef\raggedleft{% 7294 \parindent=0pt \leftskip0pt plus2em 7295 \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt 7296 \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off 7297 % badness reporting. 7298} 7299\let\Eraggedleft\par 7300 7301\envdef\raggedcenter{% 7302 \parindent=0pt \rightskip0pt plus1em \leftskip0pt plus1em 7303 \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt 7304 \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off 7305 % badness reporting. 7306} 7307\let\Eraggedcenter\par 7308 7309 7310% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) 7311% and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since 7312% we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and 7313% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0. 7314% 7315\makedispenvdef{quotation}{\quotationstart} 7316% 7317\def\quotationstart{% 7318 \indentedblockstart % same as \indentedblock, but increase right margin too. 7319 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 7320 \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing 7321 \fi 7322 \parsearg\quotationlabel 7323} 7324 7325% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're 7326% doing normal filling. 7327% 7328\def\Equotation{% 7329 \par 7330 \ifx\quotationauthor\thisisundefined\else 7331 % indent a bit. 7332 \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}% 7333 \fi 7334 {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% 7335} 7336\def\Esmallquotation{\Equotation} 7337 7338% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after. 7339\def\quotationlabel#1{% 7340 \def\temp{#1}% 7341 \ifx\temp\empty \else 7342 {\bf #1: }% 7343 \fi 7344} 7345 7346% @indentedblock is like @quotation, but indents only on the left and 7347% has no optional argument. 7348% 7349\makedispenvdef{indentedblock}{\indentedblockstart} 7350% 7351\def\indentedblockstart{% 7352 {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip 7353 \parindent=0pt 7354 % 7355 % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down. 7356 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 7357 \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing 7358 \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing 7359 \else 7360 \let\nonarrowing = \relax 7361 \fi 7362} 7363 7364% Keep a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're doing normal filling. 7365% 7366\def\Eindentedblock{% 7367 \par 7368 {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% 7369} 7370\def\Esmallindentedblock{\Eindentedblock} 7371 7372 7373% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>} 7374% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter, 7375% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg: 7376% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org 7377% 7378% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook. 7379% 7380% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets 7381% active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a 7382% verbatim line. 7383\def\dospecials{% 7384 \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&% 7385 \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~% 7386 \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"% 7387 % Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and 7388 % @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and 7389 % @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled. 7390 %\do\`\do\'% 7391} 7392% 7393% [Knuth] p. 380 7394\def\uncatcodespecials{% 7395 \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials} 7396% 7397% Setup for the @verb command. 7398% 7399% Eight spaces for a tab 7400\begingroup 7401 \catcode`\^^I=\active 7402 \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }} 7403\endgroup 7404% 7405\def\setupverb{% 7406 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim 7407 \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}% 7408 \setcodequotes 7409 \tabeightspaces 7410 % Respect line breaks, 7411 % print special symbols as themselves, and 7412 % make each space count 7413 % must do in this order: 7414 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces 7415} 7416 7417% Setup for the @verbatim environment 7418% 7419% Real tab expansion. 7420\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount 7421% 7422% We typeset each line of the verbatim in an \hbox, so we can handle 7423% tabs. 7424\newbox\verbbox 7425\def\starttabbox{\setbox\verbbox=\hbox\bgroup} 7426% 7427\begingroup 7428 \catcode`\^^I=\active 7429 \gdef\tabexpand{% 7430 \catcode`\^^I=\active 7431 \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup 7432 \dimen\verbbox=\wd\verbbox % the width so far, or since the previous tab 7433 \divide\dimen\verbbox by\tabw 7434 \multiply\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw 7435 \advance\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw 7436 \wd\verbbox=\dimen\verbbox 7437 \leavevmode\box\verbbox \starttabbox 7438 }% 7439 } 7440\endgroup 7441 7442% start the verbatim environment. 7443\def\setupverbatim{% 7444 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7445 \nonfillstart 7446 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim 7447 \def\par{\egroup\leavevmode\box\verbbox\endgraf\starttabbox}% 7448 \tabexpand 7449 \setcodequotes 7450 % Respect line breaks, 7451 % print special symbols as themselves, and 7452 % make each space count. 7453 % Must do in this order: 7454 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces 7455} 7456 7457% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique 7458% delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a 7459% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace: 7460% 7461% \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1} 7462% 7463% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {} 7464\begingroup 7465 \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other 7466 \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next] 7467\endgroup 7468% 7469\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb} 7470% 7471% 7472% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that 7473% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie: 7474% 7475% \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1} 7476% 7477% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX, 7478% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}': 7479% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'. 7480% 7481% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx] 7482% 7483\begingroup 7484 \catcode`\ =\active 7485 \obeylines % 7486 % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end 7487 % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank 7488 % line in the output. 7489 \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{% 7490 \starttabbox#2\egroup\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}% 7491 % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but 7492 % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble. 7493 % The \egroup ends the \verbbox started at the end of the last line in 7494 % the block. 7495\endgroup 7496% 7497\envdef\verbatim{% 7498 \setnormaldispenv\setupverbatim\doverbatim 7499} 7500\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak 7501 7502 7503% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment. 7504% 7505\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude} 7506% 7507\def\doverbatiminclude#1{% 7508 {% 7509 \makevalueexpandable 7510 \setupverbatim 7511 {% 7512 \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. 7513 \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @verbatiminclude of #1^^J}% 7514 \edef\tmp{\noexpand\input #1 } 7515 \expandafter 7516 }\expandafter\starttabbox\tmp\egroup 7517 \afterenvbreak 7518 }% 7519} 7520 7521% @copying ... @end copying. 7522% Save the text away for @insertcopying later. 7523% 7524% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box. 7525% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the 7526% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done 7527% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source 7528% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as 7529% possible is desirable. 7530% 7531\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying} 7532\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}} 7533% 7534\def\insertcopying{% 7535 \begingroup 7536 \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page 7537 \scanexp\copyingtext 7538 \endgroup 7539} 7540 7541 7542\message{defuns,} 7543% @defun etc. 7544 7545\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in 7546\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt 7547\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt 7548\newcount\defunpenalty 7549 7550% Start the processing of @deffn: 7551\def\startdefun{% 7552 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 7553 \medbreak 7554 \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the 7555 % following @def command, see below. 7556 \else 7557 % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak, 7558 % which is there to keep the function description together with its 7559 % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a 7560 % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted 7561 % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning 7562 % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow 7563 % a break between a section heading and a defun. 7564 % 7565 % As a further refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling 7566 % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the 7567 % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following 7568 % @def command. 7569 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi 7570 % 7571 % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break. 7572 % But do insert the glue. 7573 \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint 7574 \fi 7575 % 7576 \parindent=0in 7577 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent 7578 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent 7579} 7580 7581\def\dodefunx#1{% 7582 % First, check whether we are in the right environment: 7583 \checkenv#1% 7584 % 7585 % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row. 7586 % It's not a great place, though. 7587 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi 7588 % 7589 % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun: 7590 \expandafter\gobbledefun#1% 7591} 7592\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{} 7593 7594% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text} 7595% 7596\def\printdefunline#1#2{% 7597 \begingroup 7598 \plainfrenchspacing 7599 % call \deffnheader: 7600 #1#2 \endheader 7601 % common ending: 7602 \interlinepenalty = 10000 7603 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil\relax 7604 \endgraf 7605 \nobreak\vskip -\parskip 7606 \penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx 7607 % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses, 7608 % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize. 7609 \checkparencounts 7610 \endgroup 7611} 7612 7613\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak} 7614 7615% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn; 7616% the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader. 7617% 7618\def\makedefun#1{% 7619 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun 7620 \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun 7621 \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}% 7622 \temp 7623} 7624 7625% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader { (defn. of \deffnheader) } 7626% 7627% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters. 7628% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly. 7629% 7630\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{% 7631 \envdef#1{% 7632 \startdefun 7633 \doingtypefnfalse % distinguish typed functions from all else 7634 \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}% 7635 }% 7636 \def#2{\dodefunx#1}% 7637 \def#3% 7638} 7639 7640\newif\ifdoingtypefn % doing typed function? 7641\newif\ifrettypeownline % typeset return type on its own line? 7642 7643% @deftypefnnewline on|off says whether the return type of typed functions 7644% are printed on their own line. This affects @deftypefn, @deftypefun, 7645% @deftypeop, and @deftypemethod. 7646% 7647\parseargdef\deftypefnnewline{% 7648 \def\temp{#1}% 7649 \ifx\temp\onword 7650 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname 7651 = \empty 7652 \else\ifx\temp\offword 7653 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname 7654 = \relax 7655 \else 7656 \errhelp = \EMsimple 7657 \errmessage{Unknown @txideftypefnnl value `\temp', 7658 must be on|off}% 7659 \fi\fi 7660} 7661 7662% \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic} 7663% 7664% If SUBTOPIC is present, precede it with a space, and call \doind. 7665% (At some time during the 20th century, this made a two-level entry in an 7666% index such as the operation index. Nobody seemed to notice the change in 7667% behaviour though.) 7668\def\dosubind#1#2#3{% 7669 \def\thirdarg{#3}% 7670 \ifx\thirdarg\empty 7671 \doind{#1}{#2}% 7672 \else 7673 \doind{#1}{#2\space#3}% 7674 \fi 7675} 7676 7677% Untyped functions: 7678 7679% @deffn category name args 7680\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}} 7681 7682% @deffn category class name args 7683\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}} 7684 7685% \defopon {category on}class name args 7686\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 7687 7688% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args 7689% 7690\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{% 7691 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}% 7692 \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}% 7693} 7694 7695% Typed functions: 7696 7697% @deftypefn category type name args 7698\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}} 7699 7700% @deftypeop category class type name args 7701\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}} 7702 7703% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args 7704\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 7705 7706% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args 7707% 7708\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% 7709 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}% 7710 \doingtypefntrue 7711 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% 7712} 7713 7714% Typed variables: 7715 7716% @deftypevr category type var args 7717\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}} 7718 7719% @deftypecv category class type var args 7720\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}} 7721 7722% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args 7723\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 7724 7725% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args 7726% 7727\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% 7728 \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}% 7729 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% 7730} 7731 7732% Untyped variables: 7733 7734% @defvr category var args 7735\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} } 7736 7737% @defcv category class var args 7738\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}} 7739 7740% \defcvof {category of}class var args 7741\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} } 7742 7743% Types: 7744 7745% @deftp category name args 7746\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{% 7747 \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}% 7748 \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}% 7749} 7750 7751% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts: 7752\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } 7753\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} } 7754\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} } 7755\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } 7756\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} } 7757\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} } 7758\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} } 7759\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon} 7760\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon} 7761\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} 7762\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} 7763 7764% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args). 7765% #1 is the category, such as "Function". 7766% #2 is the return type, if any. 7767% #3 is the function name. 7768% 7769% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any. 7770% 7771\def\defname#1#2#3{% 7772 \par 7773 % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def... 7774 \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent 7775 % 7776 % Determine if we are typesetting the return type of a typed function 7777 % on a line by itself. 7778 \rettypeownlinefalse 7779 \ifdoingtypefn % doing a typed function specifically? 7780 % then check user option for putting return type on its own line: 7781 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname\relax \else 7782 \rettypeownlinetrue 7783 \fi 7784 \fi 7785 % 7786 % How we'll format the category name. Putting it in brackets helps 7787 % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line 7788 % just below it. 7789 \def\temp{#1}% 7790 \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi} 7791 % 7792 % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. We'll always have at 7793 % least two. 7794 \tempnum = 2 7795 % 7796 % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero, 7797 % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it: 7798 \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip 7799 % 7800 % If doing a return type on its own line, we'll have another line. 7801 \ifrettypeownline 7802 \advance\tempnum by 1 7803 \def\maybeshapeline{0in \hsize}% 7804 \else 7805 \def\maybeshapeline{}% 7806 \fi 7807 % 7808 % The continuations: 7809 \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent 7810 % 7811 % The final paragraph shape: 7812 \parshape \tempnum 0in \dimen0 \maybeshapeline \defargsindent \dimen2 7813 % 7814 % Put the category name at the right margin. 7815 \noindent 7816 \hbox to 0pt{% 7817 \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize 7818 % \hsize has to be shortened this way: 7819 \kern\leftskip 7820 % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space. 7821 }% 7822 % 7823 % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint: 7824 \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 7825 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent 7826 {% 7827 % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because: 7828 % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle. 7829 % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's 7830 % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in 7831 % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm. 7832 % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures. 7833 % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no 7834 % one has made identifiers using them :). 7835 \df \tt 7836 \def\temp{#2}% text of the return type 7837 \ifx\temp\empty\else 7838 \tclose{\temp}% typeset the return type 7839 \ifrettypeownline 7840 % put return type on its own line; prohibit line break following: 7841 \hfil\vadjust{\nobreak}\break 7842 \else 7843 \space % type on same line, so just followed by a space 7844 \fi 7845 \fi % no return type 7846 #3% output function name 7847 }% 7848 {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \rmfont 7849 % 7850 \boldbrax 7851 % arguments will be output next, if any. 7852} 7853 7854% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using 7855% tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in 7856% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very 7857% distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars. 7858% 7859\def\defunargs#1{% 7860 % use sl by default (not ttsl), 7861 % tt for the names. 7862 \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0 7863 % 7864 % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we 7865 % want a way to get ttsl. We used to recommend @var for that, so 7866 % leave the code in, but it's strange for @var to lead to typewriter. 7867 % Nowadays we recommend @code, since the difference between a ttsl hyphen 7868 % and a tt hyphen is pretty tiny. @code also disables ?` !`. 7869 \def\var##1{{\setregularquotes\ttslanted{##1}}}% 7870 #1% 7871 \sl\hyphenchar\font=45 7872} 7873 7874% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line. 7875% 7876\def\activeparens{% 7877 \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active 7878 \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active 7879 \catcode`\&=\active 7880} 7881 7882% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars. 7883\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = ) 7884 7885% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example, 7886% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet, 7887% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence. 7888{ 7889 \activeparens 7890 \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen 7891 \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack 7892 \global\let& = \& 7893 7894 \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} 7895 \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm} 7896} 7897\let\ampchar\& 7898 7899\newcount\parencount 7900 7901% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards 7902\newif\ifampseen 7903\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }} 7904 7905\def\parenfont{% 7906 \ifampseen 7907 % At the first level, print parens in roman, 7908 % otherwise use the default font. 7909 \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi 7910 \else 7911 % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than 7912 % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] . 7913 \sf 7914 \fi 7915} 7916\def\infirstlevel#1{% 7917 \ifampseen 7918 \ifnum\parencount=1 7919 #1% 7920 \fi 7921 \fi 7922} 7923\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf} 7924 7925\def\opnr{% 7926 \global\advance\parencount by 1 7927 {\parenfont(}% 7928 \infirstlevel \bfafterword 7929} 7930\def\clnr{% 7931 {\parenfont)}% 7932 \infirstlevel \sl 7933 \global\advance\parencount by -1 7934} 7935 7936\newcount\brackcount 7937\def\lbrb{% 7938 \global\advance\brackcount by 1 7939 {\bf[}% 7940} 7941\def\rbrb{% 7942 {\bf]}% 7943 \global\advance\brackcount by -1 7944} 7945 7946\def\checkparencounts{% 7947 \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi 7948 \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi 7949} 7950% these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually 7951% has such constructs (when documenting function pointers). 7952\def\badparencount{% 7953 \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}% 7954 \global\parencount=0 7955} 7956\def\badbrackcount{% 7957 \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}% 7958 \global\brackcount=0 7959} 7960 7961 7962\message{macros,} 7963% @macro. 7964 7965% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens, 7966% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX. 7967\ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined 7968 \newwrite\macscribble 7969 \def\scantokens#1{% 7970 \toks0={#1}% 7971 \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp 7972 \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}% 7973 \immediate\closeout\macscribble 7974 \input \jobname.tmp 7975 } 7976\fi 7977 7978\let\E=\expandafter 7979 7980% Used at the time of macro expansion. 7981% Argument is macro body with arguments substituted 7982\def\scanmacro#1{% 7983 \newlinechar`\^^M 7984 % expand the expansion of \eatleadingcr twice to maybe remove a leading 7985 % newline (and \else and \fi tokens), then call \eatspaces on the result. 7986 \def\xeatspaces##1{% 7987 \E\E\E\E\E\E\E\eatspaces\E\E\E\E\E\E\E{\eatleadingcr##1% 7988 }}% 7989 \def\xempty##1{}% 7990 % 7991 % Process the macro body under the current catcode regime. 7992 \scantokens{#1@comment}% 7993 % 7994 % The \comment is to remove the \newlinechar added by \scantokens, and 7995 % can be noticed by \parsearg. Note \c isn't used because this means cedilla 7996 % in math mode. 7997} 7998 7999% Used for copying and captions 8000\def\scanexp#1{% 8001 \expandafter\scanmacro\expandafter{#1}% 8002} 8003 8004\newcount\paramno % Count of parameters 8005\newtoks\macname % Macro name 8006\newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive? 8007 8008% List of all defined macros in the form 8009% \commondummyword\macro1\commondummyword\macro2... 8010% Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split 8011% if there is a need. 8012\def\macrolist{} 8013 8014% Add the macro to \macrolist 8015\def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname} 8016\def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{% 8017 \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\commondummyword#1}% 8018 \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}% 8019} 8020 8021% Utility routines. 8022% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is, 8023% \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname 8024% (except of course we have to play expansion games). 8025% 8026\def\cslet#1#2{% 8027 \expandafter\let 8028 \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname 8029 \csname#2\endcsname 8030} 8031 8032% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string. 8033% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN). 8034{\catcode`\@=11 8035\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }} 8036\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@} 8037\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @} 8038\def\unbrace#1{#1} 8039\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1} 8040} 8041 8042{\catcode`\^^M=\other% 8043\gdef\eatleadingcr#1{\if\noexpand#1\noexpand^^M\else\E#1\fi}}% 8044% Warning: this won't work for a delimited argument 8045% or for an empty argument 8046 8047% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string. 8048{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3% 8049\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}% 8050\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}% 8051\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}% 8052} 8053 8054% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where 8055% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active 8056% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \ 8057% to recognize macro arguments; this is the job of \mbodybackslash. 8058% 8059% Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate 8060% them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to 8061% confine the change to the current group. 8062% 8063% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is 8064% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro 8065% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro. 8066% 8067\def\scanctxt{% used as subroutine 8068 \catcode`\"=\other 8069 \catcode`\+=\other 8070 \catcode`\<=\other 8071 \catcode`\>=\other 8072 \catcode`\^=\other 8073 \catcode`\_=\other 8074 \catcode`\|=\other 8075 \catcode`\~=\other 8076 \passthroughcharstrue 8077} 8078 8079\def\scanargctxt{% used for copying and captions, not macros. 8080 \scanctxt 8081 \catcode`\@=\other 8082 \catcode`\\=\other 8083 \catcode`\^^M=\other 8084} 8085 8086\def\macrobodyctxt{% used for @macro definitions 8087 \scanctxt 8088 \catcode`\ =\other 8089 \catcode`\@=\other 8090 \catcode`\{=\other 8091 \catcode`\}=\other 8092 \catcode`\^^M=\other 8093 \usembodybackslash 8094} 8095 8096% Used when scanning braced macro arguments. Note, however, that catcode 8097% changes here are ineffectual if the macro invocation was nested inside 8098% an argument to another Texinfo command. 8099\def\macroargctxt{% 8100 \scanctxt 8101 \catcode`\ =\active 8102 \catcode`\@=\other 8103 \catcode`\^^M=\other 8104 \catcode`\\=\active 8105} 8106 8107\def\macrolineargctxt{% used for whole-line arguments without braces 8108 \scanctxt 8109 \catcode`\@=\other 8110 \catcode`\{=\other 8111 \catcode`\}=\other 8112} 8113 8114% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies. 8115% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N 8116% where N is the macro parameter number. 8117% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so 8118% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash. 8119% 8120{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active 8121 @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash} 8122 @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname} 8123} 8124\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash} 8125 8126\def\margbackslash#1{\char`\#1 } 8127 8128\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx} 8129\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx} 8130 8131\def\macroxxx#1{% 8132 \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist 8133 \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments 8134 \paramno=0\relax 8135 \else 8136 \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;% 8137 \if\paramno>256\relax 8138 \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined 8139 \errhelp = \EMsimple 8140 \errmessage{You need eTeX to compile a file with macros with more than 256 arguments} 8141 \fi 8142 \fi 8143 \fi 8144 \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname 8145 \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}% 8146 \else 8147 \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax 8148 \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi 8149 \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}% 8150 \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1% 8151 \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}% 8152 \fi 8153 \begingroup \macrobodyctxt 8154 \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody 8155 \else \expandafter\parsemacbody 8156 \fi} 8157 8158\parseargdef\unmacro{% 8159 \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname 8160 \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}% 8161 \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0% 8162 % Remove the macro name from \macrolist: 8163 \begingroup 8164 \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax 8165 \let\commondummyword\unmacrodo 8166 \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}% 8167 \endgroup 8168 \else 8169 \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}% 8170 \fi 8171} 8172 8173% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any 8174% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax. 8175% 8176\def\unmacrodo#1{% 8177 \ifx #1\relax 8178 % remove this 8179 \else 8180 \noexpand\commondummyword \noexpand#1% 8181 \fi 8182} 8183 8184% \getargs -- Parse the arguments to a @macro line. Set \macname to 8185% the name of the macro, and \argl to the braced argument list. 8186\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}} 8187\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs} 8188\def\getmacname#1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}} 8189\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}} 8190% This made use of the feature that if the last token of a 8191% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by 8192% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed. 8193 8194% Parse the optional {params} list to @macro or @rmacro. 8195% Set \paramno to the number of arguments, 8196% and \paramlist to a parameter text for the macro (e.g. #1,#2,#3 for a 8197% three-param macro.) Define \macarg.BLAH for each BLAH in the params 8198% list to some hook where the argument is to be expanded. If there are 8199% less than 10 arguments that hook is to be replaced by ##N where N 8200% is the position in that list, that is to say the macro arguments are to be 8201% defined `a la TeX in the macro body. 8202% 8203% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above). 8204% 8205% If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used: see 8206% \parsemmanyargdef. 8207% 8208\def\parsemargdef#1;{% 8209 \paramno=0\def\paramlist{}% 8210 \let\hash\relax 8211 % \hash is redefined to `#' later to get it into definitions 8212 \let\xeatspaces\relax 8213 \let\xempty\relax 8214 \parsemargdefxxx#1,;,% 8215 \ifnum\paramno<10\relax\else 8216 \paramno0\relax 8217 \parsemmanyargdef@@#1,;,% 10 or more arguments 8218 \fi 8219} 8220\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{% 8221 \if#1;\let\next=\relax 8222 \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx 8223 \advance\paramno by 1 8224 \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname 8225 {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno\noexpand\xempty{}}}% 8226 \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}% 8227 \fi\next} 8228% the \xempty{} is to give \eatleadingcr an argument in the case of an 8229% empty macro argument. 8230 8231% \parsemacbody, \parsermacbody 8232% 8233% Read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. (They're different since 8234% rec and nonrec macros end differently.) 8235% 8236% We are in \macrobodyctxt, and the \xdef causes backslashshes in the macro 8237% body to be transformed. 8238% Set \macrobody to the body of the macro, and call \defmacro. 8239% 8240{\catcode`\ =\other\long\gdef\parsemacbody#1@end macro{% 8241\xdef\macrobody{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}}% 8242{\catcode`\ =\other\long\gdef\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro{% 8243\xdef\macrobody{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}}% 8244 8245% Make @ a letter, so that we can make private-to-Texinfo macro names. 8246\edef\texiatcatcode{\the\catcode`\@} 8247\catcode `@=11\relax 8248 8249%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Code for > 10 arguments only %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8250 8251% If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used, where the 8252% hook remains in the body, and when macro is to be expanded the body is 8253% processed again to replace the arguments. 8254% 8255% In that case, the hook is \the\toks N-1, and we simply set \toks N-1 to the 8256% argument N value and then \edef the body (nothing else will expand because of 8257% the catcode regime under which the body was input). 8258% 8259% If you compile with TeX (not eTeX), and you have macros with 10 or more 8260% arguments, no macro can have more than 256 arguments (else error). 8261% 8262% In case that there are 10 or more arguments we parse again the arguments 8263% list to set new definitions for the \macarg.BLAH macros corresponding to 8264% each BLAH argument. It was anyhow needed to parse already once this list 8265% in order to count the arguments, and as macros with at most 9 arguments 8266% are by far more frequent than macro with 10 or more arguments, defining 8267% twice the \macarg.BLAH macros does not cost too much processing power. 8268\def\parsemmanyargdef@@#1,{% 8269 \if#1;\let\next=\relax 8270 \else 8271 \let\next=\parsemmanyargdef@@ 8272 \edef\tempb{\eatspaces{#1}}% 8273 \expandafter\def\expandafter\tempa 8274 \expandafter{\csname macarg.\tempb\endcsname}% 8275 % Note that we need some extra \noexpand\noexpand, this is because we 8276 % don't want \the to be expanded in the \parsermacbody as it uses an 8277 % \xdef . 8278 \expandafter\edef\tempa 8279 {\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\the\toks\the\paramno}% 8280 \advance\paramno by 1\relax 8281 \fi\next} 8282 8283 8284\let\endargs@\relax 8285\let\nil@\relax 8286\def\nilm@{\nil@}% 8287\long\def\nillm@{\nil@}% 8288 8289% This macro is expanded during the Texinfo macro expansion, not during its 8290% definition. It gets all the arguments' values and assigns them to macros 8291% macarg.ARGNAME 8292% 8293% #1 is the macro name 8294% #2 is the list of argument names 8295% #3 is the list of argument values 8296\def\getargvals@#1#2#3{% 8297 \def\macargdeflist@{}% 8298 \def\saveparamlist@{#2}% Need to keep a copy for parameter expansion. 8299 \def\paramlist{#2,\nil@}% 8300 \def\macroname{#1}% 8301 \begingroup 8302 \macroargctxt 8303 \def\argvaluelist{#3,\nil@}% 8304 \def\@tempa{#3}% 8305 \ifx\@tempa\empty 8306 \setemptyargvalues@ 8307 \else 8308 \getargvals@@ 8309 \fi 8310} 8311\def\getargvals@@{% 8312 \ifx\paramlist\nilm@ 8313 % Some sanity check needed here that \argvaluelist is also empty. 8314 \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@ 8315 \else 8316 \errhelp = \EMsimple 8317 \errmessage{Too many arguments in macro `\macroname'!}% 8318 \fi 8319 \let\next\macargexpandinbody@ 8320 \else 8321 \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@ 8322 % No more arguments values passed to macro. Set remaining named-arg 8323 % macros to empty. 8324 \let\next\setemptyargvalues@ 8325 \else 8326 % pop current arg name into \@tempb 8327 \def\@tempa##1{\pop@{\@tempb}{\paramlist}##1\endargs@}% 8328 \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\paramlist}% 8329 % pop current argument value into \@tempc 8330 \def\@tempa##1{\longpop@{\@tempc}{\argvaluelist}##1\endargs@}% 8331 \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\argvaluelist}% 8332 % Here \@tempb is the current arg name and \@tempc is the current arg value. 8333 % First place the new argument macro definition into \@tempd 8334 \expandafter\macname\expandafter{\@tempc}% 8335 \expandafter\let\csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname\relax 8336 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempe\expandafter{% 8337 \csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname}% 8338 \edef\@tempd{\long\def\@tempe{\the\macname}}% 8339 \push@\@tempd\macargdeflist@ 8340 \let\next\getargvals@@ 8341 \fi 8342 \fi 8343 \next 8344} 8345 8346\def\push@#1#2{% 8347 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def 8348 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter#2% 8349 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{% 8350 \expandafter#1#2}% 8351} 8352 8353% Replace arguments by their values in the macro body, and place the result 8354% in macro \@tempa. 8355% 8356\def\macvalstoargs@{% 8357 % To do this we use the property that token registers that are \the'ed 8358 % within an \edef expand only once. So we are going to place all argument 8359 % values into respective token registers. 8360 % 8361 % First we save the token context, and initialize argument numbering. 8362 \begingroup 8363 \paramno0\relax 8364 % Then, for each argument number #N, we place the corresponding argument 8365 % value into a new token list register \toks#N 8366 \expandafter\putargsintokens@\saveparamlist@,;,% 8367 % Then, we expand the body so that argument are replaced by their 8368 % values. The trick for values not to be expanded themselves is that they 8369 % are within tokens and that tokens expand only once in an \edef . 8370 \edef\@tempc{\csname mac.\macroname .body\endcsname}% 8371 % Now we restore the token stack pointer to free the token list registers 8372 % which we have used, but we make sure that expanded body is saved after 8373 % group. 8374 \expandafter 8375 \endgroup 8376 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempc}% 8377 } 8378 8379% Define the named-macro outside of this group and then close this group. 8380% 8381\def\macargexpandinbody@{% 8382 \expandafter 8383 \endgroup 8384 \macargdeflist@ 8385 % First the replace in body the macro arguments by their values, the result 8386 % is in \@tempa . 8387 \macvalstoargs@ 8388 % Then we point at the \norecurse or \gobble (for recursive) macro value 8389 % with \@tempb . 8390 \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempb\csname mac.\macroname .recurse\endcsname 8391 % Depending on whether it is recursive or not, we need some tailing 8392 % \egroup . 8393 \ifx\@tempb\gobble 8394 \let\@tempc\relax 8395 \else 8396 \let\@tempc\egroup 8397 \fi 8398 % And now we do the real job: 8399 \edef\@tempd{\noexpand\@tempb{\macroname}\noexpand\scanmacro{\@tempa}\@tempc}% 8400 \@tempd 8401} 8402 8403\def\putargsintokens@#1,{% 8404 \if#1;\let\next\relax 8405 \else 8406 \let\next\putargsintokens@ 8407 % First we allocate the new token list register, and give it a temporary 8408 % alias \@tempb . 8409 \toksdef\@tempb\the\paramno 8410 % Then we place the argument value into that token list register. 8411 \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname macarg.#1\endcsname 8412 \expandafter\@tempb\expandafter{\@tempa}% 8413 \advance\paramno by 1\relax 8414 \fi 8415 \next 8416} 8417 8418% Trailing missing arguments are set to empty. 8419% 8420\def\setemptyargvalues@{% 8421 \ifx\paramlist\nilm@ 8422 \let\next\macargexpandinbody@ 8423 \else 8424 \expandafter\setemptyargvaluesparser@\paramlist\endargs@ 8425 \let\next\setemptyargvalues@ 8426 \fi 8427 \next 8428} 8429 8430\def\setemptyargvaluesparser@#1,#2\endargs@{% 8431 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{% 8432 \expandafter\def\csname macarg.#1\endcsname{}}% 8433 \push@\@tempa\macargdeflist@ 8434 \def\paramlist{#2}% 8435} 8436 8437% #1 is the element target macro 8438% #2 is the list macro 8439% #3,#4\endargs@ is the list value 8440\def\pop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{% 8441 \def#1{#3}% 8442 \def#2{#4}% 8443} 8444\long\def\longpop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{% 8445 \long\def#1{#3}% 8446 \long\def#2{#4}% 8447} 8448 8449 8450%%%%%%%%%%%%%% End of code for > 10 arguments %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8451 8452 8453% This defines a Texinfo @macro or @rmacro, called by \parsemacbody. 8454% \macrobody has the body of the macro in it, with placeholders for 8455% its parameters, looking like "\xeatspaces{\hash 1}". 8456% \paramno is the number of parameters 8457% \paramlist is a TeX parameter text, e.g. "#1,#2,#3," 8458% There are four cases: macros of zero, one, up to nine, and many arguments. 8459% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file 8460% they're defined in: @include reads the file inside a group. 8461% 8462\def\defmacro{% 8463 \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars 8464 \ifnum\paramno=1 8465 \def\xeatspaces##1{##1}% 8466 % This removes the pair of braces around the argument. We don't 8467 % use \eatspaces, because this can cause ends of lines to be lost 8468 % when the argument to \eatspaces is read, leading to line-based 8469 % commands like "@itemize" not being read correctly. 8470 \else 8471 \let\xeatspaces\relax % suppress expansion 8472 \fi 8473 \ifcase\paramno 8474 % 0 8475 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8476 \bgroup 8477 \noexpand\spaceisspace 8478 \noexpand\endlineisspace 8479 \noexpand\expandafter % skip any whitespace after the macro name. 8480 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname}% 8481 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname{% 8482 \egroup 8483 \noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}% 8484 \or % 1 8485 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8486 \bgroup 8487 \noexpand\braceorline 8488 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname}% 8489 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname##1{% 8490 \egroup 8491 \noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}% 8492 }% 8493 \else % at most 9 8494 \ifnum\paramno<10\relax 8495 % @MACNAME sets the context for reading the macro argument 8496 % @MACNAME@@ gets the argument, processes backslashes and appends a 8497 % comma. 8498 % @MACNAME@@@ removes braces surrounding the argument list. 8499 % @MACNAME@@@@ scans the macro body with arguments substituted. 8500 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8501 \bgroup 8502 \noexpand\expandafter % This \expandafter skip any spaces after the 8503 \noexpand\macroargctxt % macro before we change the catcode of space. 8504 \noexpand\expandafter 8505 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname}% 8506 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname##1{% 8507 \noexpand\passargtomacro 8508 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname{##1,}}% 8509 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname##1{% 8510 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname ##1}% 8511 \expandafter\expandafter 8512 \expandafter\xdef 8513 \expandafter\expandafter 8514 \csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname\paramlist{% 8515 \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}% 8516 \else % 10 or more: 8517 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8518 \noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}% 8519 }% 8520 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\macrobody 8521 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\gobble 8522 \fi 8523 \fi} 8524 8525\catcode `\@\texiatcatcode\relax % end private-to-Texinfo catcodes 8526 8527\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}} 8528 8529 8530%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8531% 8532{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=13 % We need to manipulate \ so use @ as escape 8533@catcode`@_=11 % private names 8534@catcode`@!=11 % used as argument separator 8535 8536% \passargtomacro#1#2 - 8537% Call #1 with a list of tokens #2, with any doubled backslashes in #2 8538% compressed to one. 8539% 8540% This implementation works by expansion, and not execution (so we cannot use 8541% \def or similar). This reduces the risk of this failing in contexts where 8542% complete expansion is done with no execution (for example, in writing out to 8543% an auxiliary file for an index entry). 8544% 8545% State is kept in the input stream: the argument passed to 8546% @look_ahead, @gobble_and_check_finish and @add_segment is 8547% 8548% THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT ! {PENDING_BS} NEXT_TOKEN (... rest of input) 8549% 8550% where: 8551% THE_MACRO - name of the macro we want to call 8552% ARG_RESULT - argument list we build to pass to that macro 8553% PENDING_BS - either a backslash or nothing 8554% NEXT_TOKEN - used to look ahead in the input stream to see what's coming next 8555 8556@gdef@passargtomacro#1#2{% 8557 @add_segment #1!{}@relax#2\@_finish\% 8558} 8559@gdef@_finish{@_finishx} @global@let@_finishx@relax 8560 8561% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT 8562% #2 - PENDING_BS 8563% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN 8564% #4 used to look ahead 8565% 8566% If the next token is not a backslash, process the rest of the argument; 8567% otherwise, remove the next token. 8568@gdef@look_ahead#1!#2#3#4{% 8569 @ifx#4\% 8570 @expandafter@gobble_and_check_finish 8571 @else 8572 @expandafter@add_segment 8573 @fi#1!{#2}#4#4% 8574} 8575 8576% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT 8577% #2 - PENDING_BS 8578% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN 8579% #4 should be a backslash, which is gobbled. 8580% #5 looks ahead 8581% 8582% Double backslash found. Add a single backslash, and look ahead. 8583@gdef@gobble_and_check_finish#1!#2#3#4#5{% 8584 @add_segment#1\!{}#5#5% 8585} 8586 8587@gdef@is_fi{@fi} 8588 8589% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT 8590% #2 - PENDING_BS 8591% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN 8592% #4 is input stream until next backslash 8593% 8594% Input stream is either at the start of the argument, or just after a 8595% backslash sequence, either a lone backslash, or a doubled backslash. 8596% NEXT_TOKEN contains the first token in the input stream: if it is \finish, 8597% finish; otherwise, append to ARG_RESULT the segment of the argument up until 8598% the next backslash. PENDING_BACKSLASH contains a backslash to represent 8599% a backslash just before the start of the input stream that has not been 8600% added to ARG_RESULT. 8601@gdef@add_segment#1!#2#3#4\{% 8602@ifx#3@_finish 8603 @call_the_macro#1!% 8604@else 8605 % append the pending backslash to the result, followed by the next segment 8606 @expandafter@is_fi@look_ahead#1#2#4!{\}@fi 8607 % this @fi is discarded by @look_ahead. 8608 % we can't get rid of it with \expandafter because we don't know how 8609 % long #4 is. 8610} 8611 8612% #1 - THE_MACRO 8613% #2 - ARG_RESULT 8614% #3 discards the res of the conditional in @add_segment, and @is_fi ends the 8615% conditional. 8616@gdef@call_the_macro#1#2!#3@fi{@is_fi #1{#2}} 8617 8618} 8619%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8620 8621% \braceorline MAC is used for a one-argument macro MAC. It checks 8622% whether the next non-whitespace character is a {. It sets the context 8623% for reading the argument (slightly different in the two cases). Then, 8624% to read the argument, in the whole-line case, it then calls the regular 8625% \parsearg MAC; in the lbrace case, it calls \passargtomacro MAC. 8626% 8627\def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx} 8628\def\braceorlinexxx{% 8629 \ifx\nchar\bgroup 8630 \macroargctxt 8631 \expandafter\passargtomacro 8632 \else 8633 \macrolineargctxt\expandafter\parsearg 8634 \fi \macnamexxx} 8635 8636 8637% @alias. 8638% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal 8639% sign. Make them active and then expand them all to nothing. 8640% 8641\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx} 8642\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax} 8643\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{% 8644 {% 8645 \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty 8646 \addtomacrolist{#1}% 8647 \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}% 8648 }% 8649 \next 8650} 8651 8652 8653\message{cross references,} 8654 8655\newwrite\auxfile 8656\newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known. 8657\newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known. 8658 8659% @inforef is relatively simple. 8660\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} 8661\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{% 8662 \putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, 8663 node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} 8664 8665% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in 8666% cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and 8667% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like: 8668% @node foo , bar , ... 8669% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name. 8670% 8671\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse} 8672% 8673% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this: 8674% @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs 8675\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse} 8676\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}\omittopnode} 8677 8678% Used so that the @top node doesn't have to be wrapped in an @ifnottex 8679% conditional. 8680% \doignore goes to more effort to skip nested conditionals but we don't need 8681% that here. 8682\def\omittopnode{% 8683 \ifx\lastnode\wordTop 8684 \expandafter\ignorenode\fi 8685} 8686\def\wordTop{Top} 8687 8688% Until the next @node or @bye command, divert output to a box that is not 8689% output. 8690\def\ignorenode{\setbox\dummybox\vbox\bgroup\def\node{\egroup\node}% 8691\ignorenodebye 8692} 8693 8694{\let\bye\relax 8695\gdef\ignorenodebye{\let\bye\ignorenodebyedef} 8696\gdef\ignorenodebyedef{\egroup(`Top' node ignored)\bye}} 8697% The redefinition of \bye here is because it is declared \outer 8698 8699\let\lastnode=\empty 8700 8701% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the 8702% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing). 8703% 8704\def\donoderef#1{% 8705 \ifx\lastnode\empty\else 8706 \setref{\lastnode}{#1}% 8707 \global\let\lastnode=\empty 8708 \fi 8709} 8710 8711% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point. 8712% 8713\newcount\savesfregister 8714% 8715\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi} 8716\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi} 8717\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces} 8718 8719% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an 8720% anchor), which consists of three parts: 8721% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \currentsection, 8722% or the anchor name. 8723% 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or 8724% empty for anchors. 8725% 3) NAME-pg - the page number. 8726% 8727% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of 8728% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here: 8729% 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats. 8730% 8731\def\setref#1#2{% 8732 \pdfmkdest{#1}% 8733 \iflinks 8734 {% 8735 \requireauxfile 8736 \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them 8737 % match definition in \xrdef, \refx, \xrefX. 8738 \def\value##1{##1}% 8739 \edef\writexrdef##1##2{% 8740 \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef 8741 ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef 8742 }% 8743 \toks0 = \expandafter{\currentsection}% 8744 \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }% 8745 \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc. 8746 \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, at \shipout 8747 }% 8748 \fi 8749} 8750 8751% @xrefautosectiontitle on|off says whether @section(ing) names are used 8752% automatically in xrefs, if the third arg is not explicitly specified. 8753% This was provided as a "secret" @set xref-automatic-section-title 8754% variable, now it's official. 8755% 8756\parseargdef\xrefautomaticsectiontitle{% 8757 \def\temp{#1}% 8758 \ifx\temp\onword 8759 \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname 8760 = \empty 8761 \else\ifx\temp\offword 8762 \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname 8763 = \relax 8764 \else 8765 \errhelp = \EMsimple 8766 \errmessage{Unknown @xrefautomaticsectiontitle value `\temp', 8767 must be on|off}% 8768 \fi\fi 8769} 8770 8771% 8772% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is 8773% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed 8774% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed 8775% manual. All but the node name can be omitted. 8776% 8777\def\pxref{\putwordsee{} \xrefXX} 8778\def\xref{\putwordSee{} \xrefXX} 8779\def\ref{\xrefXX} 8780 8781\def\xrefXX#1{\def\xrefXXarg{#1}\futurelet\tokenafterxref\xrefXXX} 8782\def\xrefXXX{\expandafter\xrefX\expandafter[\xrefXXarg,,,,,,,]} 8783% 8784\newbox\toprefbox 8785\newbox\printedrefnamebox 8786\newbox\infofilenamebox 8787\newbox\printedmanualbox 8788% 8789\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup 8790 \unsepspaces 8791 % 8792 % Get args without leading/trailing spaces. 8793 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}% 8794 \setbox\printedrefnamebox = \hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}% 8795 % 8796 \def\infofilename{\ignorespaces #4}% 8797 \setbox\infofilenamebox = \hbox{\infofilename\unskip}% 8798 % 8799 \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}% 8800 \setbox\printedmanualbox = \hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}% 8801 % 8802 % If the printed reference name (arg #3) was not explicitly given in 8803 % the @xref, figure out what we want to use. 8804 \ifdim \wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt 8805 % No printed node name was explicitly given. 8806 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname \relax 8807 % Not auto section-title: use node name inside the square brackets. 8808 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 8809 \else 8810 % Auto section-title: use chapter/section title inside 8811 % the square brackets if we have it. 8812 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt 8813 % It is in another manual, so we don't have it; use node name. 8814 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 8815 \else 8816 \ifhavexrefs 8817 % We (should) know the real title if we have the xref values. 8818 \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}}% 8819 \else 8820 % Otherwise just copy the Info node name. 8821 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 8822 \fi% 8823 \fi 8824 \fi 8825 \fi 8826 % 8827 % Make link in pdf output. 8828 \ifpdf 8829 % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX 8830 {\indexnofonts 8831 \makevalueexpandable 8832 \turnoffactive 8833 % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _ 8834 % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. This ignores all spaces in 8835 % #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename. 8836 \getfilename{#4}% 8837 % 8838 % This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing 8839 % spaces in #1, which should be ignored. 8840 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 8841 % 8842 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 8843 \def\pdfdestname{Top}% no empty targets 8844 \fi 8845 % 8846 \leavevmode 8847 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 8848 \ifnum\filenamelength>0 8849 goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfdestname}% 8850 \else 8851 goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfdestname}}% 8852 \fi 8853 }% 8854 \setcolor{\linkcolor}% 8855 \else 8856 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 8857 \else 8858 % For XeTeX 8859 {\indexnofonts 8860 \makevalueexpandable 8861 \turnoffactive 8862 % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _ 8863 % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. This ignores all spaces in 8864 % #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename. 8865 \getfilename{#4}% 8866 % 8867 % This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing 8868 % spaces in #1, which should be ignored. 8869 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 8870 % 8871 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 8872 \def\pdfdestname{Top}% no empty targets 8873 \fi 8874 % 8875 \leavevmode 8876 \ifnum\filenamelength>0 8877 % With default settings, 8878 % XeTeX (xdvipdfmx) replaces link destination names with integers. 8879 % In this case, the replaced destination names of 8880 % remote PDFs are no longer known. In order to avoid a replacement, 8881 % you can use xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010'. 8882 % If you use XeTeX 0.99996+ (TeX Live 2016+), 8883 % this command line option is no longer necessary 8884 % because we can use the `dvipdfmx:config' special. 8885 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A 8886 << /S /GoToR /F (\the\filename.pdf) /D (\pdfdestname) >> >>}% 8887 \else 8888 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A 8889 << /S /GoTo /D (\pdfdestname) >> >>}% 8890 \fi 8891 }% 8892 \setcolor{\linkcolor}% 8893 \fi 8894 \fi 8895 {% 8896 % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to 8897 % include an _ in the xref name, etc. 8898 \indexnofonts 8899 \turnoffactive 8900 \def\value##1{##1}% 8901 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle 8902 \csname XR#1-title\endcsname 8903 }% 8904 % 8905 % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2" 8906 % instead of "[somenode], p.3". \iffloat distinguishes them by 8907 % \Xthisreftitle being set to a magic string. 8908 \iffloat\Xthisreftitle 8909 % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref, 8910 % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2". 8911 \ifdim\wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt 8912 \refx{#1-snt}% 8913 \else 8914 \printedrefname 8915 \fi 8916 % 8917 % If the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append 8918 % "in MANUALNAME". 8919 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt 8920 \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% 8921 \fi 8922 \else 8923 % node/anchor (non-float) references. 8924 % 8925 % If we use \unhbox to print the node names, TeX does not insert 8926 % empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will not 8927 % find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals 8928 % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, 8929 % this is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name 8930 % again, so it is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time. 8931 % 8932 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt 8933 % Cross-manual reference with a printed manual name. 8934 % 8935 \crossmanualxref{\cite{\printedmanual\unskip}}% 8936 % 8937 \else\ifdim \wd\infofilenamebox > 0pt 8938 % Cross-manual reference with only an info filename (arg 4), no 8939 % printed manual name (arg 5). This is essentially the same as 8940 % the case above; we output the filename, since we have nothing else. 8941 % 8942 \crossmanualxref{\code{\infofilename\unskip}}% 8943 % 8944 \else 8945 % Reference within this manual. 8946 % 8947 % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty, as the ref 8948 % will be empty for @unnumbered and @anchor. 8949 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}}% 8950 \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi 8951 % 8952 % output the `[mynode]' via the macro below so it can be overridden. 8953 \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname 8954 % 8955 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiomitxrefpg\endcsname\relax 8956 % But we always want a comma and a space: 8957 ,\space 8958 % 8959 % output the `page 3'. 8960 \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}% 8961 % Add a , if xref followed by a space 8962 \if\space\noexpand\tokenafterxref ,% 8963 \else\ifx\ \tokenafterxref ,% @TAB 8964 \else\ifx\*\tokenafterxref ,% @* 8965 \else\ifx\ \tokenafterxref ,% @SPACE 8966 \else\ifx\ 8967 \tokenafterxref ,% @NL 8968 \else\ifx\tie\tokenafterxref ,% @tie 8969 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 8970 \fi 8971 \fi\fi 8972 \fi 8973 \endlink 8974\endgroup} 8975 8976% Output a cross-manual xref to #1. Used just above (twice). 8977% 8978% Only include the text "Section ``foo'' in" if the foo is neither 8979% missing or Top. Thus, @xref{,,,foo,The Foo Manual} outputs simply 8980% "see The Foo Manual", the idea being to refer to the whole manual. 8981% 8982% But, this being TeX, we can't easily compare our node name against the 8983% string "Top" while ignoring the possible spaces before and after in 8984% the input. By adding the arbitrary 7sp below, we make it much less 8985% likely that a real node name would have the same width as "Top" (e.g., 8986% in a monospaced font). Hopefully it will never happen in practice. 8987% 8988% For the same basic reason, we retypeset the "Top" at every 8989% reference, since the current font is indeterminate. 8990% 8991\def\crossmanualxref#1{% 8992 \setbox\toprefbox = \hbox{Top\kern7sp}% 8993 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \printedrefname \unskip \kern7sp}% 8994 \ifdim \wd2 > 7sp % nonempty? 8995 \ifdim \wd2 = \wd\toprefbox \else % same as Top? 8996 \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{}\space 8997 \fi 8998 \fi 8999 #1% 9000} 9001 9002% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref 9003% output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily, 9004% since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly 9005% one that Bob is working on :). 9006% 9007\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]} 9008 9009% Things referred to by \setref. 9010% 9011\def\Ynothing{} 9012\def\Yomitfromtoc{} 9013\def\Ynumbered{% 9014 \ifnum\secno=0 9015 \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno 9016 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 9017 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno 9018 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 9019 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno 9020 \else 9021 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno 9022 \fi\fi\fi 9023} 9024\def\Yappendix{% 9025 \ifnum\secno=0 9026 \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}% 9027 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 9028 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno 9029 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 9030 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno 9031 \else 9032 \putwordSection@tie 9033 @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno 9034 \fi\fi\fi 9035} 9036 9037% \refx{NAME} - reference a cross-reference string named NAME. 9038\def\refx#1{% 9039 \requireauxfile 9040 {% 9041 \indexnofonts 9042 \turnoffactive 9043 \def\value##1{##1}% 9044 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX 9045 \csname XR#1\endcsname 9046 }% 9047 \ifx\thisrefX\relax 9048 % If not defined, say something at least. 9049 \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright 9050 \iflinks 9051 \ifhavexrefs 9052 {\toks0 = {#1}% avoid expansion of possibly-complex value 9053 \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `\the\toks0'.}}% 9054 \else 9055 \ifwarnedxrefs\else 9056 \global\warnedxrefstrue 9057 \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% 9058 \fi 9059 \fi 9060 \fi 9061 \else 9062 % It's defined, so just use it. 9063 \thisrefX 9064 \fi 9065} 9066 9067% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Define a control 9068% sequence for a cross-reference target (we prepend XR to the control sequence 9069% name to avoid collisions). The value is the page number. If this is a float 9070% type, we have more work to do. 9071% 9072\def\xrdef#1#2{% 9073 {% Expand the node or anchor name to remove control sequences. 9074 % \turnoffactive stops 8-bit characters being changed to commands 9075 % like @'e. \refx does the same to retrieve the value in the definition. 9076 \indexnofonts 9077 \turnoffactive 9078 \def\value##1{##1}% 9079 \xdef\safexrefname{#1}% 9080 }% 9081 % 9082 \bgroup 9083 \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% 9084 \egroup 9085 % We put the \gdef inside a group to avoid the definitions building up on 9086 % TeX's save stack, which can cause it to run out of space for aux files with 9087 % thousands of lines. \gdef doesn't use the save stack, but \csname does 9088 % when it defines an unknown control sequence as \relax. 9089 % 9090 % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float? 9091 \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname 9092 % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype. 9093 \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist 9094 \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname 9095 % 9096 % Is this the first time we've seen this float type? 9097 \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax 9098 \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do 9099 \else 9100 % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list. 9101 \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}% 9102 \fi 9103 % 9104 % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE, 9105 % for later use in \listoffloats. 9106 \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0 9107 {\safexrefname}}% 9108 \fi 9109} 9110 9111% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to 9112% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs. 9113% This is done with @novalidate at the beginning of the file. 9114% 9115\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files. 9116\let\novalidate = \linksfalse 9117 9118% Used when writing to the aux file, or when using data from it. 9119\def\requireauxfile{% 9120 \iflinks 9121 \tryauxfile 9122 % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit. 9123 \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux 9124 \fi 9125 \global\let\requireauxfile=\relax % Only do this once. 9126} 9127 9128% Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists. 9129% 9130\def\tryauxfile{% 9131 \openin 1 \jobname.aux 9132 \ifeof 1 \else 9133 \readdatafile{aux}% 9134 \global\havexrefstrue 9135 \fi 9136 \closein 1 9137} 9138 9139\def\setupdatafile{% 9140 \catcode`\^^@=\other 9141 \catcode`\^^A=\other 9142 \catcode`\^^B=\other 9143 \catcode`\^^C=\other 9144 \catcode`\^^D=\other 9145 \catcode`\^^E=\other 9146 \catcode`\^^F=\other 9147 \catcode`\^^G=\other 9148 \catcode`\^^H=\other 9149 \catcode`\^^K=\other 9150 \catcode`\^^L=\other 9151 \catcode`\^^N=\other 9152 \catcode`\^^P=\other 9153 \catcode`\^^Q=\other 9154 \catcode`\^^R=\other 9155 \catcode`\^^S=\other 9156 \catcode`\^^T=\other 9157 \catcode`\^^U=\other 9158 \catcode`\^^V=\other 9159 \catcode`\^^W=\other 9160 \catcode`\^^X=\other 9161 \catcode`\^^Z=\other 9162 \catcode`\^^[=\other 9163 \catcode`\^^\=\other 9164 \catcode`\^^]=\other 9165 \catcode`\^^^=\other 9166 \catcode`\^^_=\other 9167 \catcode`\^=\other 9168 % 9169 % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but... 9170 \catcode`\~=\other 9171 \catcode`\[=\other 9172 \catcode`\]=\other 9173 \catcode`\"=\other 9174 \catcode`\_=\active 9175 \catcode`\|=\active 9176 \catcode`\<=\active 9177 \catcode`\>=\active 9178 \catcode`\$=\other 9179 \catcode`\#=\other 9180 \catcode`\&=\other 9181 \catcode`\%=\other 9182 \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off 9183 % 9184 \catcode`\\=\active 9185 % 9186 % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces. 9187 \catcode`\{=1 9188 \catcode`\}=2 9189 \catcode`\@=0 9190} 9191 9192\def\readdatafile#1{% 9193\begingroup 9194 \setupdatafile 9195 \input\jobname.#1 9196\endgroup} 9197 9198 9199\message{insertions,} 9200% including footnotes. 9201 9202\newcount \footnoteno 9203 9204% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is 9205% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a 9206% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is 9207% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a 9208% space to prevent strange expansion errors.) 9209\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } 9210 9211% @footnotestyle is meaningful for Info output only. 9212\let\footnotestyle=\comment 9213 9214{\catcode `\@=11 9215% 9216% Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain. 9217\gdef\footnote{% 9218 \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne 9219 \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}% 9220 % 9221 % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the 9222 % extra spacing after we do the footnote number. 9223 \let\@sf\empty 9224 \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi 9225 % 9226 % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number. 9227 \unskip 9228 \thisfootno\@sf 9229 \dofootnote 9230}% 9231 9232% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the 9233% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general. 9234% 9235% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses 9236% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when 9237% the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96. 9238% 9239\gdef\dofootnote{% 9240 \insert\footins\bgroup 9241 % 9242 % Nested footnotes are not supported in TeX, that would take a lot 9243 % more work. (\startsavinginserts does not suffice.) 9244 \let\footnote=\errfootnotenest 9245 % 9246 % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the 9247 % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. 9248 % So reset some parameters. 9249 \hsize=\txipagewidth 9250 \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty 9251 \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes 9252 \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox 9253 \floatingpenalty\@MM 9254 \leftskip\z@skip 9255 \rightskip\z@skip 9256 \spaceskip\z@skip 9257 \xspaceskip\z@skip 9258 \parindent\defaultparindent 9259 % 9260 \smallfonts \rm 9261 % 9262 % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears 9263 % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use 9264 % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote 9265 % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style). 9266 \let\noindent = \relax 9267 % 9268 % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the 9269 % footnote extends for more than one paragraph. 9270 \everypar = {\hang}% 9271 \textindent{\thisfootno}% 9272 % 9273 % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this 9274 % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it 9275 % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. 9276 \footstrut 9277 % 9278 % Invoke rest of plain TeX footnote routine. 9279 \futurelet\next\fo@t 9280} 9281}%end \catcode `\@=11 9282 9283\def\errfootnotenest{% 9284 \errhelp=\EMsimple 9285 \errmessage{Nested footnotes not supported in texinfo.tex, 9286 even though they work in makeinfo; sorry} 9287} 9288 9289\def\errfootnoteheading{% 9290 \errhelp=\EMsimple 9291 \errmessage{Footnotes in chapters, sections, etc., are not supported} 9292} 9293 9294% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create 9295% the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion 9296% would be lost. 9297% Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote 9298% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished. 9299% And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03. 9300% 9301% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro. 9302% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled 9303% out prematurely. 9304% 9305\def\startsavinginserts{% 9306 \ifx \insert\ptexinsert 9307 \let\insert\saveinsert 9308 \else 9309 \let\checkinserts\relax 9310 \fi 9311} 9312 9313% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and 9314% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}. 9315% 9316\def\saveinsert#1{% 9317 \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}% 9318 \afterassignment\next 9319 % swallow the left brace 9320 \let\temp = 9321} 9322\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}} 9323\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1} 9324 9325\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi} 9326 9327\def\placesaveins#1{% 9328 \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname 9329 {\box#1}% 9330} 9331 9332% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other: 9333{ 9334 \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-) 9335 \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{} 9336} 9337 9338% initialization: 9339\def\newsaveins #1{% 9340 \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}% 9341 \next 9342} 9343\def\newsaveinsX #1{% 9344 \csname newbox\endcsname #1% 9345 \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts 9346 \checksaveins #1}% 9347} 9348 9349% initialize: 9350\let\checkinserts\empty 9351\newsaveins\footins 9352\newsaveins\margin 9353 9354 9355% @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this. 9356% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain. 9357% 9358% Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image 9359% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get 9360% undone and the next image would fail. 9361\openin 1 = epsf.tex 9362\ifeof 1 \else 9363 % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in 9364 % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan). 9365 \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }% 9366 \input epsf.tex 9367\fi 9368\closein 1 9369% 9370% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex. 9371\newif\ifwarnednoepsf 9372\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to 9373 work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get 9374 it from https://ctan.org/texarchive/macros/texinfo/texinfo/doc/epsf.tex.} 9375% 9376\def\image#1{% 9377 \ifx\epsfbox\thisisundefined 9378 \ifwarnednoepsf \else 9379 \errhelp = \noepsfhelp 9380 \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}% 9381 \global\warnednoepsftrue 9382 \fi 9383 \else 9384 \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish 9385 \fi 9386} 9387% 9388% Arguments to @image: 9389% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension. 9390% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height. 9391% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text. 9392% #5 is (ignored optional) extension. 9393% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing stuff. 9394\newif\ifimagevmode 9395\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup 9396 \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example 9397 \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names 9398 \makevalueexpandable 9399 % If the image is by itself, center it. 9400 \ifvmode 9401 \imagevmodetrue 9402 \else \ifx\centersub\centerV 9403 % for @center @image, we need a vbox so we can have our vertical space 9404 \imagevmodetrue 9405 \vbox\bgroup % vbox has better behavior than vtop herev 9406 \fi\fi 9407 % 9408 \ifimagevmode 9409 \medskip 9410 % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert 9411 % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space 9412 % above and below. 9413 \nobreak\vskip\parskip 9414 \nobreak 9415 \fi 9416 % 9417 % Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing 9418 % environment such as @quotation is respected. 9419 % However, if we're at the top level, we don't want the 9420 % normal paragraph indentation. 9421 % On the other hand, if we are in the case of @center @image, we don't 9422 % want to start a paragraph, which will create a hsize-width box and 9423 % eradicate the centering. 9424 \ifx\centersub\centerV \else \imageindent \fi 9425 % 9426 % Output the image. 9427 \ifpdf 9428 % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX <= 0.80 9429 \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}% 9430 \else 9431 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 9432 % For epsf.tex 9433 % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure. 9434 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 9435 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi 9436 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 9437 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi 9438 \epsfbox{#1.eps}% 9439 \else 9440 % For XeTeX 9441 \doxeteximage{#1}{#2}{#3}% 9442 \fi 9443 \fi 9444 % 9445 \ifimagevmode 9446 \medskip % space after a standalone image 9447 \fi 9448 \ifx\centersub\centerV \egroup \fi 9449\endgroup} 9450 9451 9452% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables, 9453% etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the 9454% float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future. 9455% 9456\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish} 9457 9458% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it. 9459\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,} 9460 9461% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically 9462% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted, 9463% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to. 9464% 9465% #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to 9466% be referable. 9467% 9468% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It 9469% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom). 9470% 9471% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each 9472% chapter-level command. 9473\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty 9474% 9475\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% 9476 \let\thiscaption=\empty 9477 \let\thisshortcaption=\empty 9478 % 9479 % don't lose footnotes inside @float. 9480 % 9481 % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an 9482 % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04 9483 % 9484 \startsavinginserts 9485 % 9486 % We can't be used inside a paragraph. 9487 \par 9488 % 9489 \vtop\bgroup 9490 \def\floattype{#1}% 9491 \def\floatlabel{#2}% 9492 \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet. 9493 % 9494 \ifx\floattype\empty 9495 \let\safefloattype=\empty 9496 \else 9497 {% 9498 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, 9499 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. 9500 \indexnofonts 9501 \turnoffactive 9502 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% 9503 }% 9504 \fi 9505 % 9506 % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type. 9507 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 9508 % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1, 9509 % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.) 9510 % 9511 \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname 9512 \global\advance\floatno by 1 9513 % 9514 {% 9515 % This magic value for \currentsection is output by \setref as the 9516 % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float 9517 % labels (which have a completely different output format) from 9518 % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the 9519 % lists of floats. 9520 % 9521 \edef\currentsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}% 9522 \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}% 9523 }% 9524 \fi 9525 % 9526 % start with \parskip glue, I guess. 9527 \vskip\parskip 9528 % 9529 % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section. 9530 \restorefirstparagraphindent 9531} 9532 9533% we have these possibilities: 9534% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap 9535% @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1 9536% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap 9537% @float Foo & no caption: Foo 9538% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap 9539% @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1 9540% @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap 9541% @float & no caption: 9542% 9543\def\Efloat{% 9544 \let\floatident = \empty 9545 % 9546 % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first. 9547 \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi 9548 % 9549 % If we have an xref label, the number comes next. 9550 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 9551 \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first. 9552 \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}% 9553 \fi 9554 % the number. 9555 \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% 9556 \fi 9557 % 9558 % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in 9559 % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again. 9560 \let\captionline = \floatident 9561 % 9562 \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else 9563 \ifx\floatident\empty \else 9564 \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between 9565 \fi 9566 % 9567 % caption text. 9568 \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}% 9569 \fi 9570 % 9571 % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before. 9572 % Eventually this needs to become an \insert. 9573 \ifx\captionline\empty \else 9574 \vskip.5\parskip 9575 \captionline 9576 % 9577 % Space below caption. 9578 \vskip\parskip 9579 \fi 9580 % 9581 % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this 9582 % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint. 9583 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 9584 % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as 9585 % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short 9586 % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing. 9587 {% 9588 \requireauxfile 9589 \atdummies 9590 % 9591 \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty 9592 \def\gtemp{\thiscaption}% 9593 \else 9594 \def\gtemp{\thisshortcaption}% 9595 \fi 9596 \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident 9597 \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}% 9598 }% 9599 \fi 9600 \egroup % end of \vtop 9601 % 9602 \checkinserts 9603} 9604 9605% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either. 9606% 9607\def\appendtomacro#1#2{% 9608 \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}% 9609} 9610 9611% @caption, @shortcaption 9612% 9613\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption} 9614\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption} 9615\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption} 9616\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}} 9617 9618% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are 9619% going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno. 9620\def\getfloatno#1{% 9621 \ifx#1\relax 9622 % Haven't seen this figure type before. 9623 \csname newcount\endcsname #1% 9624 % 9625 % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap. 9626 \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos 9627 \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }% 9628 \fi 9629 \let\floatno#1% 9630} 9631 9632% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref 9633% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we 9634% first read the @float command. 9635% 9636\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% 9637 9638% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can 9639% distinguish floats from other xref types. 9640\def\floatmagic{!!float!!} 9641 9642% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional 9643% which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic 9644% \currentsection value which we \setref above. 9645% 9646\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish} 9647% 9648% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the 9649% (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2. 9650% 9651\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{% 9652 \def\temp{#1}% 9653 \def\iffloattype{#2}% 9654 \ifx\temp\floatmagic 9655} 9656 9657% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents. 9658% 9659\parseargdef\listoffloats{% 9660 \def\floattype{#1}% floattype 9661 {% 9662 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, 9663 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. 9664 \indexnofonts 9665 \turnoffactive 9666 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% 9667 }% 9668 % 9669 % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE. 9670 \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax 9671 \ifhavexrefs 9672 % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo. 9673 \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}% 9674 \fi 9675 \else 9676 \begingroup 9677 \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc 9678 \let\do=\listoffloatsdo 9679 \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname 9680 \endgroup 9681 \fi 9682} 9683 9684% This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the 9685% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the 9686% aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which 9687% has the text we're supposed to typeset here. 9688% 9689% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since 9690% they won't appear in the aux file). 9691% 9692\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish} 9693\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{% 9694 % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just 9695 % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the 9696 % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link 9697 % in pdf output. 9698 \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}% 9699 % 9700 % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index. 9701 \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}% 9702 \writeentry 9703}} 9704 9705 9706\message{localization,} 9707 9708% For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very 9709% early, just after @documentencoding. Single argument is the language 9710% (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation. 9711% 9712{ 9713 \catcode`\_ = \active 9714 \globaldefs=1 9715\parseargdef\documentlanguage{% 9716 \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX. 9717 % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists. 9718 \let_ = \normalunderscore % normal _ character for filename test 9719 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex 9720 \ifeof 1 9721 \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore #1_\finish 9722 \else 9723 \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist 9724 \input txi-#1.tex 9725 \fi 9726 \closein 1 9727 \endgroup % end raw TeX 9728} 9729% 9730% If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist, 9731% try txi-de.tex. 9732% 9733\gdef\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{% 9734 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex 9735 \ifeof 1 9736 \errhelp = \nolanghelp 9737 \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}% 9738 \else 9739 \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist 9740 \input txi-#1.tex 9741 \fi 9742 \closein 1 9743} 9744}% end of special _ catcode 9745% 9746\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or 9747is empty. Maybe you need to install it? Putting it in the current 9748directory should work if nowhere else does.} 9749 9750% This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the 9751% \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and 9752% third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin. 9753% 9754% The language names to pass are determined when the format is built. 9755% See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g., 9756% /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log. 9757% 9758% With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all 9759% available languages. This means we can support hyphenation in 9760% Texinfo, at least to some extent. (This still doesn't solve the 9761% accented characters problem.) 9762% 9763\catcode`@=11 9764\def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{% 9765 % do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX. 9766 \expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax 9767 \message{no patterns for #1}% 9768 \else 9769 \global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname 9770 \fi 9771 % but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless. 9772 \global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax 9773 \global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax 9774} 9775 9776% XeTeX and LuaTeX can handle Unicode natively. 9777% Their default I/O uses UTF-8 sequences instead of a byte-wise operation. 9778% Other TeX engines' I/O (pdfTeX, etc.) is byte-wise. 9779% 9780\newif\iftxinativeunicodecapable 9781\newif\iftxiusebytewiseio 9782 9783\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 9784 \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 9785 \txinativeunicodecapablefalse 9786 \txiusebytewiseiotrue 9787 \else 9788 \txinativeunicodecapabletrue 9789 \txiusebytewiseiofalse 9790 \fi 9791\else 9792 \txinativeunicodecapabletrue 9793 \txiusebytewiseiofalse 9794\fi 9795 9796% Set I/O by bytes instead of UTF-8 sequence for XeTeX and LuaTex 9797% for non-UTF-8 (byte-wise) encodings. 9798% 9799\def\setbytewiseio{% 9800 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 9801 \else 9802 \XeTeXdefaultencoding "bytes" % For subsequent files to be read 9803 \XeTeXinputencoding "bytes" % For document root file 9804 % Unfortunately, there seems to be no corresponding XeTeX command for 9805 % output encoding. This is a problem for auxiliary index and TOC files. 9806 % The only solution would be perhaps to write out @U{...} sequences in 9807 % place of non-ASCII characters. 9808 \fi 9809 9810 \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 9811 \else 9812 \directlua{ 9813 local utf8_char, byte, gsub = unicode.utf8.char, string.byte, string.gsub 9814 local function convert_char (char) 9815 return utf8_char(byte(char)) 9816 end 9817 9818 local function convert_line (line) 9819 return gsub(line, ".", convert_char) 9820 end 9821 9822 callback.register("process_input_buffer", convert_line) 9823 9824 local function convert_line_out (line) 9825 local line_out = "" 9826 for c in string.utfvalues(line) do 9827 line_out = line_out .. string.char(c) 9828 end 9829 return line_out 9830 end 9831 9832 callback.register("process_output_buffer", convert_line_out) 9833 } 9834 \fi 9835 9836 \txiusebytewiseiotrue 9837} 9838 9839 9840% Helpers for encodings. 9841% Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number. 9842% 9843\def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{% 9844 \count255=128 9845 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 9846 \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax 9847 \advance\count255 by 1 9848 \repeat 9849} 9850 9851\def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{% 9852 \count255=128 9853 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 9854 \catcode\count255=#1\relax 9855 \advance\count255 by 1 9856 \repeat 9857} 9858 9859% @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters 9860% according to the specified encoding. 9861% 9862\def\documentencoding{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\documentencodingzzz} 9863\def\documentencodingzzz#1{% 9864 % 9865 % Encoding being declared for the document. 9866 \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}% 9867 % 9868 % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able 9869 % to compare them with \ifx. 9870 \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}% 9871 \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}% 9872 \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}% 9873 \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}% 9874 \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}% 9875 % 9876 \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii 9877 \asciichardefs 9878 % 9879 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo 9880 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 9881 \setbytewiseio 9882 \fi 9883 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 9884 \lattwochardefs 9885 % 9886 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone 9887 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 9888 \setbytewiseio 9889 \fi 9890 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 9891 \latonechardefs 9892 % 9893 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine 9894 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 9895 \setbytewiseio 9896 \fi 9897 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 9898 \latninechardefs 9899 % 9900 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 9901 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 9902 % For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX) 9903 \nativeunicodechardefs 9904 \else 9905 % For treating UTF-8 as byte sequences (TeX, eTeX and pdfTeX) 9906 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 9907 % since we already invoked \utfeightchardefs at the top level 9908 % (below), do not re-invoke it, otherwise our check for duplicated 9909 % definitions gets triggered. Making non-ascii chars active is 9910 % sufficient. 9911 \fi 9912 % 9913 \else 9914 \message{Ignoring unknown document encoding: #1.}% 9915 % 9916 \fi % utfeight 9917 \fi % latnine 9918 \fi % latone 9919 \fi % lattwo 9920 \fi % ascii 9921 % 9922 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 9923 \else 9924 \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 9925 \else 9926 \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii 9927 \else 9928 \message{Warning: XeTeX with non-UTF-8 encodings cannot handle % 9929 non-ASCII characters in auxiliary files.}% 9930 \fi 9931 \fi 9932 \fi 9933} 9934 9935% emacs-page 9936% A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available 9937% the default font encoding (OT1). 9938% 9939\def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing, sorry: #1.}} 9940 9941% Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference. 9942\def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi} 9943 9944% First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be 9945% correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of 9946% macros containing the character definitions. 9947\setnonasciicharscatcode\active 9948% 9949 9950\def\gdefchar#1#2{% 9951\gdef#1{% 9952 \ifpassthroughchars 9953 \string#1% 9954 \else 9955 #2% 9956 \fi 9957}} 9958 9959% Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions. 9960\def\latonechardefs{% 9961 \gdefchar^^a0{\tie} 9962 \gdefchar^^a1{\exclamdown} 9963 \gdefchar^^a2{{\tcfont \char162}} % cent 9964 \gdefchar^^a3{\pounds{}} 9965 \gdefchar^^a4{{\tcfont \char164}} % currency 9966 \gdefchar^^a5{{\tcfont \char165}} % yen 9967 \gdefchar^^a6{{\tcfont \char166}} % broken bar 9968 \gdefchar^^a7{\S} 9969 \gdefchar^^a8{\"{}} 9970 \gdefchar^^a9{\copyright{}} 9971 \gdefchar^^aa{\ordf} 9972 \gdefchar^^ab{\guillemetleft{}} 9973 \gdefchar^^ac{\ensuremath\lnot} 9974 \gdefchar^^ad{\-} 9975 \gdefchar^^ae{\registeredsymbol{}} 9976 \gdefchar^^af{\={}} 9977 % 9978 \gdefchar^^b0{\textdegree} 9979 \gdefchar^^b1{$\pm$} 9980 \gdefchar^^b2{$^2$} 9981 \gdefchar^^b3{$^3$} 9982 \gdefchar^^b4{\'{}} 9983 \gdefchar^^b5{$\mu$} 9984 \gdefchar^^b6{\P} 9985 \gdefchar^^b7{\ensuremath\cdot} 9986 \gdefchar^^b8{\cedilla\ } 9987 \gdefchar^^b9{$^1$} 9988 \gdefchar^^ba{\ordm} 9989 \gdefchar^^bb{\guillemetright{}} 9990 \gdefchar^^bc{$1\over4$} 9991 \gdefchar^^bd{$1\over2$} 9992 \gdefchar^^be{$3\over4$} 9993 \gdefchar^^bf{\questiondown} 9994 % 9995 \gdefchar^^c0{\`A} 9996 \gdefchar^^c1{\'A} 9997 \gdefchar^^c2{\^A} 9998 \gdefchar^^c3{\~A} 9999 \gdefchar^^c4{\"A} 10000 \gdefchar^^c5{\ringaccent A} 10001 \gdefchar^^c6{\AE} 10002 \gdefchar^^c7{\cedilla C} 10003 \gdefchar^^c8{\`E} 10004 \gdefchar^^c9{\'E} 10005 \gdefchar^^ca{\^E} 10006 \gdefchar^^cb{\"E} 10007 \gdefchar^^cc{\`I} 10008 \gdefchar^^cd{\'I} 10009 \gdefchar^^ce{\^I} 10010 \gdefchar^^cf{\"I} 10011 % 10012 \gdefchar^^d0{\DH} 10013 \gdefchar^^d1{\~N} 10014 \gdefchar^^d2{\`O} 10015 \gdefchar^^d3{\'O} 10016 \gdefchar^^d4{\^O} 10017 \gdefchar^^d5{\~O} 10018 \gdefchar^^d6{\"O} 10019 \gdefchar^^d7{$\times$} 10020 \gdefchar^^d8{\O} 10021 \gdefchar^^d9{\`U} 10022 \gdefchar^^da{\'U} 10023 \gdefchar^^db{\^U} 10024 \gdefchar^^dc{\"U} 10025 \gdefchar^^dd{\'Y} 10026 \gdefchar^^de{\TH} 10027 \gdefchar^^df{\ss} 10028 % 10029 \gdefchar^^e0{\`a} 10030 \gdefchar^^e1{\'a} 10031 \gdefchar^^e2{\^a} 10032 \gdefchar^^e3{\~a} 10033 \gdefchar^^e4{\"a} 10034 \gdefchar^^e5{\ringaccent a} 10035 \gdefchar^^e6{\ae} 10036 \gdefchar^^e7{\cedilla c} 10037 \gdefchar^^e8{\`e} 10038 \gdefchar^^e9{\'e} 10039 \gdefchar^^ea{\^e} 10040 \gdefchar^^eb{\"e} 10041 \gdefchar^^ec{\`{\dotless i}} 10042 \gdefchar^^ed{\'{\dotless i}} 10043 \gdefchar^^ee{\^{\dotless i}} 10044 \gdefchar^^ef{\"{\dotless i}} 10045 % 10046 \gdefchar^^f0{\dh} 10047 \gdefchar^^f1{\~n} 10048 \gdefchar^^f2{\`o} 10049 \gdefchar^^f3{\'o} 10050 \gdefchar^^f4{\^o} 10051 \gdefchar^^f5{\~o} 10052 \gdefchar^^f6{\"o} 10053 \gdefchar^^f7{$\div$} 10054 \gdefchar^^f8{\o} 10055 \gdefchar^^f9{\`u} 10056 \gdefchar^^fa{\'u} 10057 \gdefchar^^fb{\^u} 10058 \gdefchar^^fc{\"u} 10059 \gdefchar^^fd{\'y} 10060 \gdefchar^^fe{\th} 10061 \gdefchar^^ff{\"y} 10062} 10063 10064% Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions. 10065\def\latninechardefs{% 10066 % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1. 10067 \latonechardefs 10068 % 10069 \gdefchar^^a4{\euro{}} 10070 \gdefchar^^a6{\v S} 10071 \gdefchar^^a8{\v s} 10072 \gdefchar^^b4{\v Z} 10073 \gdefchar^^b8{\v z} 10074 \gdefchar^^bc{\OE} 10075 \gdefchar^^bd{\oe} 10076 \gdefchar^^be{\"Y} 10077} 10078 10079% Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions. 10080\def\lattwochardefs{% 10081 \gdefchar^^a0{\tie} 10082 \gdefchar^^a1{\ogonek{A}} 10083 \gdefchar^^a2{\u{}} 10084 \gdefchar^^a3{\L} 10085 \gdefchar^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}} 10086 \gdefchar^^a5{\v L} 10087 \gdefchar^^a6{\'S} 10088 \gdefchar^^a7{\S} 10089 \gdefchar^^a8{\"{}} 10090 \gdefchar^^a9{\v S} 10091 \gdefchar^^aa{\cedilla S} 10092 \gdefchar^^ab{\v T} 10093 \gdefchar^^ac{\'Z} 10094 \gdefchar^^ad{\-} 10095 \gdefchar^^ae{\v Z} 10096 \gdefchar^^af{\dotaccent Z} 10097 % 10098 \gdefchar^^b0{\textdegree{}} 10099 \gdefchar^^b1{\ogonek{a}} 10100 \gdefchar^^b2{\ogonek{ }} 10101 \gdefchar^^b3{\l} 10102 \gdefchar^^b4{\'{}} 10103 \gdefchar^^b5{\v l} 10104 \gdefchar^^b6{\'s} 10105 \gdefchar^^b7{\v{}} 10106 \gdefchar^^b8{\cedilla\ } 10107 \gdefchar^^b9{\v s} 10108 \gdefchar^^ba{\cedilla s} 10109 \gdefchar^^bb{\v t} 10110 \gdefchar^^bc{\'z} 10111 \gdefchar^^bd{\H{}} 10112 \gdefchar^^be{\v z} 10113 \gdefchar^^bf{\dotaccent z} 10114 % 10115 \gdefchar^^c0{\'R} 10116 \gdefchar^^c1{\'A} 10117 \gdefchar^^c2{\^A} 10118 \gdefchar^^c3{\u A} 10119 \gdefchar^^c4{\"A} 10120 \gdefchar^^c5{\'L} 10121 \gdefchar^^c6{\'C} 10122 \gdefchar^^c7{\cedilla C} 10123 \gdefchar^^c8{\v C} 10124 \gdefchar^^c9{\'E} 10125 \gdefchar^^ca{\ogonek{E}} 10126 \gdefchar^^cb{\"E} 10127 \gdefchar^^cc{\v E} 10128 \gdefchar^^cd{\'I} 10129 \gdefchar^^ce{\^I} 10130 \gdefchar^^cf{\v D} 10131 % 10132 \gdefchar^^d0{\DH} 10133 \gdefchar^^d1{\'N} 10134 \gdefchar^^d2{\v N} 10135 \gdefchar^^d3{\'O} 10136 \gdefchar^^d4{\^O} 10137 \gdefchar^^d5{\H O} 10138 \gdefchar^^d6{\"O} 10139 \gdefchar^^d7{$\times$} 10140 \gdefchar^^d8{\v R} 10141 \gdefchar^^d9{\ringaccent U} 10142 \gdefchar^^da{\'U} 10143 \gdefchar^^db{\H U} 10144 \gdefchar^^dc{\"U} 10145 \gdefchar^^dd{\'Y} 10146 \gdefchar^^de{\cedilla T} 10147 \gdefchar^^df{\ss} 10148 % 10149 \gdefchar^^e0{\'r} 10150 \gdefchar^^e1{\'a} 10151 \gdefchar^^e2{\^a} 10152 \gdefchar^^e3{\u a} 10153 \gdefchar^^e4{\"a} 10154 \gdefchar^^e5{\'l} 10155 \gdefchar^^e6{\'c} 10156 \gdefchar^^e7{\cedilla c} 10157 \gdefchar^^e8{\v c} 10158 \gdefchar^^e9{\'e} 10159 \gdefchar^^ea{\ogonek{e}} 10160 \gdefchar^^eb{\"e} 10161 \gdefchar^^ec{\v e} 10162 \gdefchar^^ed{\'{\dotless{i}}} 10163 \gdefchar^^ee{\^{\dotless{i}}} 10164 \gdefchar^^ef{\v d} 10165 % 10166 \gdefchar^^f0{\dh} 10167 \gdefchar^^f1{\'n} 10168 \gdefchar^^f2{\v n} 10169 \gdefchar^^f3{\'o} 10170 \gdefchar^^f4{\^o} 10171 \gdefchar^^f5{\H o} 10172 \gdefchar^^f6{\"o} 10173 \gdefchar^^f7{$\div$} 10174 \gdefchar^^f8{\v r} 10175 \gdefchar^^f9{\ringaccent u} 10176 \gdefchar^^fa{\'u} 10177 \gdefchar^^fb{\H u} 10178 \gdefchar^^fc{\"u} 10179 \gdefchar^^fd{\'y} 10180 \gdefchar^^fe{\cedilla t} 10181 \gdefchar^^ff{\dotaccent{}} 10182} 10183 10184% UTF-8 character definitions. 10185% 10186% This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some 10187% changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by 10188% permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team. 10189% 10190\newcount\countUTFx 10191\newcount\countUTFy 10192\newcount\countUTFz 10193 10194\gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter 10195 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname} 10196% 10197\gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter 10198 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname} 10199% 10200\gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter 10201 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname} 10202 10203\gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{% 10204 \ifx #1\relax 10205 \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}% 10206 \else 10207 \expandafter #1% 10208 \fi 10209} 10210 10211% Give non-ASCII bytes the active definitions for processing UTF-8 sequences 10212\begingroup 10213 \catcode`\~13 10214 \catcode`\$12 10215 \catcode`\"12 10216 10217 % Loop from \countUTFx to \countUTFy, performing \UTFviiiTmp 10218 % substituting ~ and $ with a character token of that value. 10219 \def\UTFviiiLoop{% 10220 \global\catcode\countUTFx\active 10221 \uccode`\~\countUTFx 10222 \uccode`\$\countUTFx 10223 \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}% 10224 \advance\countUTFx by 1 10225 \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy 10226 \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop 10227 \fi} 10228 10229 % For bytes other than the first in a UTF-8 sequence. Not expected to 10230 % be expanded except when writing to auxiliary files. 10231 \countUTFx = "80 10232 \countUTFy = "C2 10233 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10234 \gdef~{% 10235 \ifpassthroughchars $\fi}}% 10236 \UTFviiiLoop 10237 10238 \countUTFx = "C2 10239 \countUTFy = "E0 10240 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10241 \gdef~{% 10242 \ifpassthroughchars $% 10243 \else\expandafter\UTFviiiTwoOctets\expandafter$\fi}}% 10244 \UTFviiiLoop 10245 10246 \countUTFx = "E0 10247 \countUTFy = "F0 10248 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10249 \gdef~{% 10250 \ifpassthroughchars $% 10251 \else\expandafter\UTFviiiThreeOctets\expandafter$\fi}}% 10252 \UTFviiiLoop 10253 10254 \countUTFx = "F0 10255 \countUTFy = "F4 10256 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10257 \gdef~{% 10258 \ifpassthroughchars $% 10259 \else\expandafter\UTFviiiFourOctets\expandafter$\fi 10260 }}% 10261 \UTFviiiLoop 10262\endgroup 10263 10264\def\globallet{\global\let} % save some \expandafter's below 10265 10266% @U{xxxx} to produce U+xxxx, if we support it. 10267\def\U#1{% 10268 \expandafter\ifx\csname uni:#1\endcsname \relax 10269 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 10270 % All Unicode characters can be used if native Unicode handling is 10271 % active. However, if the font does not have the glyph, 10272 % letters are missing. 10273 \begingroup 10274 \uccode`\.="#1\relax 10275 \uppercase{.} 10276 \endgroup 10277 \else 10278 \errhelp = \EMsimple 10279 \errmessage{Unicode character U+#1 not supported, sorry}% 10280 \fi 10281 \else 10282 \csname uni:#1\endcsname 10283 \fi 10284} 10285 10286% These macros are used here to construct the name of a control 10287% sequence to be defined. 10288\def\UTFviiiTwoOctetsName#1#2{% 10289 \csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname}% 10290\def\UTFviiiThreeOctetsName#1#2#3{% 10291 \csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}% 10292\def\UTFviiiFourOctetsName#1#2#3#4{% 10293 \csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}% 10294 10295% For UTF-8 byte sequences (TeX, e-TeX and pdfTeX), 10296% provide a definition macro to replace a Unicode character; 10297% this gets used by the @U command 10298% 10299\begingroup 10300 \catcode`\"=12 10301 \catcode`\<=12 10302 \catcode`\.=12 10303 \catcode`\,=12 10304 \catcode`\;=12 10305 \catcode`\!=12 10306 \catcode`\~=13 10307 \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacterUTFviii#1#2{% 10308 \countUTFz = "#1\relax 10309 \begingroup 10310 \parseXMLCharref 10311 10312 % Give \u8:... its definition. The sequence of seven \expandafter's 10313 % expands after the \gdef three times, e.g. 10314 % 10315 % 1. \UTFviiTwoOctetsName B1 B2 10316 % 2. \csname u8:B1 \string B2 \endcsname 10317 % 3. \u8: B1 B2 (a single control sequence token) 10318 % 10319 \expandafter\expandafter 10320 \expandafter\expandafter 10321 \expandafter\expandafter 10322 \expandafter\gdef \UTFviiiTmp{#2}% 10323 % 10324 \expandafter\ifx\csname uni:#1\endcsname \relax \else 10325 \message{Internal error, already defined: #1}% 10326 \fi 10327 % 10328 % define an additional control sequence for this code point. 10329 \expandafter\globallet\csname uni:#1\endcsname \UTFviiiTmp 10330 \endgroup} 10331 % 10332 % Given the value in \countUTFz as a Unicode code point, set \UTFviiiTmp 10333 % to the corresponding UTF-8 sequence. 10334 \gdef\parseXMLCharref{% 10335 \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax 10336 \errhelp = \EMsimple 10337 \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}% 10338 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax 10339 \parseUTFviiiA,% 10340 \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctetsName.,% 10341 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax 10342 \parseUTFviiiA;% 10343 \parseUTFviiiA,% 10344 \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctetsName.{,;}% 10345 \else 10346 \parseUTFviiiA;% 10347 \parseUTFviiiA,% 10348 \parseUTFviiiA!% 10349 \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctetsName.{!,;}% 10350 \fi\fi\fi 10351 } 10352 10353 % Extract a byte from the end of the UTF-8 representation of \countUTFx. 10354 % It must be a non-initial byte in the sequence. 10355 % Change \uccode of #1 for it to be used in \parseUTFviiiB as one 10356 % of the bytes. 10357 \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{% 10358 \countUTFx = \countUTFz 10359 \divide\countUTFz by 64 10360 \countUTFy = \countUTFz % Save to be the future value of \countUTFz. 10361 \multiply\countUTFz by 64 10362 10363 % \countUTFz is now \countUTFx with the last 5 bits cleared. Subtract 10364 % in order to get the last five bits. 10365 \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz 10366 10367 % Convert this to the byte in the UTF-8 sequence. 10368 \advance\countUTFx by 128 10369 \uccode `#1\countUTFx 10370 \countUTFz = \countUTFy} 10371 10372 % Used to put a UTF-8 byte sequence into \UTFviiiTmp 10373 % #1 is the increment for \countUTFz to yield a the first byte of the UTF-8 10374 % sequence. 10375 % #2 is one of the \UTFviii*OctetsName macros. 10376 % #3 is always a full stop (.) 10377 % #4 is a template for the other bytes in the sequence. The values for these 10378 % bytes is substituted in here with \uppercase using the \uccode's. 10379 \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{% 10380 \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax 10381 \uccode `#3\countUTFz 10382 \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}} 10383\endgroup 10384 10385% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX), 10386% provide a definition macro that sets a catcode to `other' non-globally 10387% 10388\def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeOther#1#2{% 10389 \catcode"#1=\other 10390} 10391 10392% https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Plane_(Unicode)#Basic_M 10393% U+0000..U+007F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Basic_Latin_(Unicode_block) 10394% U+0080..U+00FF = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin-1_Supplement_(Unicode_block) 10395% U+0100..U+017F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin_Extended-A 10396% U+0180..U+024F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin_Extended-B 10397% 10398% Many of our renditions are less than wonderful, and all the missing 10399% characters are available somewhere. Loading the necessary fonts 10400% awaits user request. We can't truly support Unicode without 10401% reimplementing everything that's been done in LaTeX for many years, 10402% plus probably using luatex or xetex, and who knows what else. 10403% We won't be doing that here in this simple file. But we can try to at 10404% least make most of the characters not bomb out. 10405% 10406\def\unicodechardefs{% 10407 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie}% 10408 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown}% 10409 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A2}{{\tcfont \char162}}% 0242=cent 10410 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds{}}% 10411 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A4}{{\tcfont \char164}}% 0244=currency 10412 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A5}{{\tcfont \char165}}% 0245=yen 10413 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A6}{{\tcfont \char166}}% 0246=brokenbar 10414 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A7}{\S}% 10415 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }}% 10416 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright{}}% 10417 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf}% 10418 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft{}}% 10419 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AC}{\ensuremath\lnot}% 10420 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-}% 10421 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol{}}% 10422 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }}% 10423 % 10424 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }}% 10425 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B1}{\ensuremath\pm}% 10426 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B2}{$^2$}% 10427 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B3}{$^3$}% 10428 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }}% 10429 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B5}{$\mu$}% 10430 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B6}{\P}% 10431 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B7}{\ensuremath\cdot}% 10432 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }}% 10433 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B9}{$^1$}% 10434 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm}% 10435 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright{}}% 10436 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BC}{$1\over4$}% 10437 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BD}{$1\over2$}% 10438 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BE}{$3\over4$}% 10439 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown}% 10440 % 10441 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A}% 10442 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A}% 10443 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A}% 10444 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A}% 10445 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A}% 10446 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA}% 10447 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE}% 10448 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}}% 10449 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E}% 10450 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E}% 10451 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E}% 10452 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E}% 10453 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I}% 10454 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I}% 10455 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I}% 10456 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I}% 10457 % 10458 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D0}{\DH}% 10459 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N}% 10460 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O}% 10461 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O}% 10462 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O}% 10463 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O}% 10464 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O}% 10465 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D7}{\ensuremath\times}% 10466 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O}% 10467 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U}% 10468 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U}% 10469 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U}% 10470 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U}% 10471 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y}% 10472 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DE}{\TH}% 10473 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss}% 10474 % 10475 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a}% 10476 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a}% 10477 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a}% 10478 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a}% 10479 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a}% 10480 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa}% 10481 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae}% 10482 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}}% 10483 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e}% 10484 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e}% 10485 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e}% 10486 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e}% 10487 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}}% 10488 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}}% 10489 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}}% 10490 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}}% 10491 % 10492 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F0}{\dh}% 10493 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n}% 10494 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o}% 10495 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o}% 10496 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o}% 10497 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o}% 10498 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o}% 10499 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F7}{\ensuremath\div}% 10500 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o}% 10501 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u}% 10502 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u}% 10503 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u}% 10504 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u}% 10505 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y}% 10506 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FE}{\th}% 10507 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y}% 10508 % 10509 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A}% 10510 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a}% 10511 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}}% 10512 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}}% 10513 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}}% 10514 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}}% 10515 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C}% 10516 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c}% 10517 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C}% 10518 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c}% 10519 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}}% 10520 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}}% 10521 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}}% 10522 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}}% 10523 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}}% 10524 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010F}{d'}% 10525 % 10526 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0110}{\DH}% 10527 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0111}{\dh}% 10528 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E}% 10529 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e}% 10530 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}}% 10531 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}}% 10532 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}}% 10533 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}}% 10534 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}}% 10535 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}}% 10536 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}}% 10537 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}}% 10538 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G}% 10539 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g}% 10540 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}}% 10541 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}}% 10542 % 10543 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}}% 10544 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}}% 10545 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0122}{\cedilla{G}}% 10546 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0123}{\cedilla{g}}% 10547 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H}% 10548 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h}% 10549 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0126}{\missingcharmsg{H WITH STROKE}}% 10550 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0127}{\missingcharmsg{h WITH STROKE}}% 10551 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I}% 10552 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}}% 10553 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I}% 10554 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}}% 10555 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}}% 10556 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}}% 10557 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012E}{\ogonek{I}}% 10558 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012F}{\ogonek{i}}% 10559 % 10560 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}}% 10561 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}}% 10562 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ}% 10563 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij}% 10564 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J}% 10565 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}}% 10566 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0136}{\cedilla{K}}% 10567 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0137}{\cedilla{k}}% 10568 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0138}{\ensuremath\kappa}% 10569 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L}% 10570 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l}% 10571 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013B}{\cedilla{L}}% 10572 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013C}{\cedilla{l}}% 10573 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013D}{L'}% should kern 10574 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013E}{l'}% should kern 10575 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013F}{L\U{00B7}}% 10576 % 10577 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0140}{l\U{00B7}}% 10578 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L}% 10579 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l}% 10580 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N}% 10581 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n}% 10582 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0145}{\cedilla{N}}% 10583 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0146}{\cedilla{n}}% 10584 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}}% 10585 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}}% 10586 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0149}{'n}% 10587 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014A}{\missingcharmsg{ENG}}% 10588 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014B}{\missingcharmsg{eng}}% 10589 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O}% 10590 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o}% 10591 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}}% 10592 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}}% 10593 % 10594 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}}% 10595 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}}% 10596 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE}% 10597 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe}% 10598 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R}% 10599 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r}% 10600 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0156}{\cedilla{R}}% 10601 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0157}{\cedilla{r}}% 10602 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}}% 10603 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}}% 10604 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S}% 10605 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s}% 10606 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S}% 10607 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s}% 10608 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}}% 10609 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}}% 10610 % 10611 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}}% 10612 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}}% 10613 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{T}}% 10614 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{t}}% 10615 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}}% 10616 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0165}{\v{t}}% 10617 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0166}{\missingcharmsg{H WITH STROKE}}% 10618 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0167}{\missingcharmsg{h WITH STROKE}}% 10619 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U}% 10620 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u}% 10621 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U}% 10622 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u}% 10623 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}}% 10624 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}}% 10625 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}}% 10626 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}}% 10627 % 10628 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}}% 10629 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}}% 10630 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0172}{\ogonek{U}}% 10631 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0173}{\ogonek{u}}% 10632 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W}% 10633 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w}% 10634 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y}% 10635 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y}% 10636 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y}% 10637 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z}% 10638 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z}% 10639 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}}% 10640 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}}% 10641 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}}% 10642 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}}% 10643 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017F}{\missingcharmsg{LONG S}}% 10644 % 10645 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}}% 10646 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}}% 10647 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}}% 10648 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ}% 10649 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj}% 10650 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj}% 10651 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ}% 10652 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj}% 10653 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj}% 10654 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}}% 10655 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}}% 10656 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}}% 10657 % 10658 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}}% 10659 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}}% 10660 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}}% 10661 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}}% 10662 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}}% 10663 % 10664 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}}% 10665 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}}% 10666 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}}% 10667 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}}% 10668 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}}% 10669 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}}% 10670 % 10671 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}}% 10672 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ}% 10673 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz}% 10674 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz}% 10675 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G}% 10676 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g}% 10677 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N}% 10678 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n}% 10679 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}}% 10680 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}}% 10681 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}}% 10682 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}}% 10683 % 10684 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}}% 10685 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}}% 10686 % 10687 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}}% 10688 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}}% 10689 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}}% 10690 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}}% 10691 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}}% 10692 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}}% 10693 % 10694 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y}% 10695 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y}% 10696 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}}% 10697 % 10698 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02BC}{'}% 10699 % 10700 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }}% 10701 % 10702 % Greek letters upper case 10703 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0391}{{\it A}}% 10704 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0392}{{\it B}}% 10705 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0393}{\ensuremath{\mit\Gamma}}% 10706 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0394}{\ensuremath{\mit\Delta}}% 10707 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0395}{{\it E}}% 10708 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0396}{{\it Z}}% 10709 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0397}{{\it H}}% 10710 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0398}{\ensuremath{\mit\Theta}}% 10711 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0399}{{\it I}}% 10712 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039A}{{\it K}}% 10713 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039B}{\ensuremath{\mit\Lambda}}% 10714 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039C}{{\it M}}% 10715 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039D}{{\it N}}% 10716 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039E}{\ensuremath{\mit\Xi}}% 10717 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039F}{{\it O}}% 10718 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A0}{\ensuremath{\mit\Pi}}% 10719 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A1}{{\it P}}% 10720 %\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A2}{} % none - corresponds to final sigma 10721 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A3}{\ensuremath{\mit\Sigma}}% 10722 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A4}{{\it T}}% 10723 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A5}{\ensuremath{\mit\Upsilon}}% 10724 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A6}{\ensuremath{\mit\Phi}}% 10725 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A7}{{\it X}}% 10726 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A8}{\ensuremath{\mit\Psi}}% 10727 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A9}{\ensuremath{\mit\Omega}}% 10728 % 10729 % Vowels with accents 10730 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0390}{\ensuremath{\ddot{\acute\iota}}}% 10731 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AC}{\ensuremath{\acute\alpha}}% 10732 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AD}{\ensuremath{\acute\epsilon}}% 10733 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AE}{\ensuremath{\acute\eta}}% 10734 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AF}{\ensuremath{\acute\iota}}% 10735 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B0}{\ensuremath{\acute{\ddot\upsilon}}}% 10736 % 10737 % Standalone accent 10738 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0384}{\ensuremath{\acute{\ }}}% 10739 % 10740 % Greek letters lower case 10741 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B1}{\ensuremath\alpha}% 10742 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B2}{\ensuremath\beta}% 10743 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B3}{\ensuremath\gamma}% 10744 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B4}{\ensuremath\delta}% 10745 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B5}{\ensuremath\epsilon}% 10746 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B6}{\ensuremath\zeta}% 10747 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B7}{\ensuremath\eta}% 10748 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B8}{\ensuremath\theta}% 10749 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B9}{\ensuremath\iota}% 10750 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BA}{\ensuremath\kappa}% 10751 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BB}{\ensuremath\lambda}% 10752 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BC}{\ensuremath\mu}% 10753 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BD}{\ensuremath\nu}% 10754 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BE}{\ensuremath\xi}% 10755 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BF}{{\it o}}% omicron 10756 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C0}{\ensuremath\pi}% 10757 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C1}{\ensuremath\rho}% 10758 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C2}{\ensuremath\varsigma}% 10759 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C3}{\ensuremath\sigma}% 10760 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C4}{\ensuremath\tau}% 10761 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C5}{\ensuremath\upsilon}% 10762 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C6}{\ensuremath\phi}% 10763 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C7}{\ensuremath\chi}% 10764 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C8}{\ensuremath\psi}% 10765 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C9}{\ensuremath\omega}% 10766 % 10767 % More Greek vowels with accents 10768 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CA}{\ensuremath{\ddot\iota}}% 10769 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CB}{\ensuremath{\ddot\upsilon}}% 10770 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CC}{\ensuremath{\acute o}}% 10771 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CD}{\ensuremath{\acute\upsilon}}% 10772 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CE}{\ensuremath{\acute\omega}}% 10773 % 10774 % Variant Greek letters 10775 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03D1}{\ensuremath\vartheta}% 10776 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03D6}{\ensuremath\varpi}% 10777 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03F1}{\ensuremath\varrho}% 10778 % 10779 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}}% 10780 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}}% 10781 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}}% 10782 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}}% 10783 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}}% 10784 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}}% 10785 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}}% 10786 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}}% 10787 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}}% 10788 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}}% 10789 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}}% 10790 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}}% 10791 % 10792 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}}% 10793 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}}% 10794 % 10795 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G}% 10796 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g}% 10797 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}}% 10798 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}}% 10799 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}}% 10800 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}}% 10801 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H}% 10802 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h}% 10803 % 10804 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K}% 10805 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k}% 10806 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}}% 10807 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}}% 10808 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}}% 10809 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}}% 10810 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}}% 10811 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}}% 10812 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}}% 10813 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}}% 10814 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M}% 10815 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m}% 10816 % 10817 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}}% 10818 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}}% 10819 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}}% 10820 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}}% 10821 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}}% 10822 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}}% 10823 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}}% 10824 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}}% 10825 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}}% 10826 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}}% 10827 % 10828 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P}% 10829 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p}% 10830 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}}% 10831 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}}% 10832 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}}% 10833 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}}% 10834 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}}% 10835 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}}% 10836 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}}% 10837 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}}% 10838 % 10839 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}}% 10840 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}}% 10841 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}}% 10842 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}}% 10843 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}}% 10844 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}}% 10845 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}}% 10846 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}}% 10847 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}}% 10848 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}}% 10849 % 10850 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V}% 10851 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v}% 10852 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}}% 10853 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}}% 10854 % 10855 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W}% 10856 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w}% 10857 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W}% 10858 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w}% 10859 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W}% 10860 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w}% 10861 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}}% 10862 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}}% 10863 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}}% 10864 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}}% 10865 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}}% 10866 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}}% 10867 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X}% 10868 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x}% 10869 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}}% 10870 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}}% 10871 % 10872 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z}% 10873 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z}% 10874 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}}% 10875 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}}% 10876 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}}% 10877 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}}% 10878 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}}% 10879 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t}% 10880 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}}% 10881 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}}% 10882 % 10883 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}}% 10884 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}}% 10885 % 10886 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}}% 10887 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}}% 10888 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E}% 10889 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e}% 10890 % 10891 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}}% 10892 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}}% 10893 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}}% 10894 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}}% 10895 % 10896 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}}% 10897 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}}% 10898 % 10899 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y}% 10900 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y}% 10901 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}}% 10902 % 10903 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y}% 10904 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y}% 10905 % 10906 % Punctuation 10907 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--}% 10908 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---}% 10909 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft{}}% 10910 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright{}}% 10911 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase{}}% 10912 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft{}}% 10913 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright{}}% 10914 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase{}}% 10915 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2020}{\ensuremath\dagger}% 10916 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2021}{\ensuremath\ddagger}% 10917 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet{}}% 10918 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{202F}{\thinspace}% 10919 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots{}}% 10920 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft{}}% 10921 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright{}}% 10922 % 10923 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro{}}% 10924 % 10925 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion{}}% 10926 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result{}}% 10927 % 10928 % Mathematical symbols 10929 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2200}{\ensuremath\forall}% 10930 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2203}{\ensuremath\exists}% 10931 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2208}{\ensuremath\in}% 10932 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus{}}% 10933 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\ast}% 10934 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221E}{\ensuremath\infty}% 10935 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2225}{\ensuremath\parallel}% 10936 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2227}{\ensuremath\wedge}% 10937 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2229}{\ensuremath\cap}% 10938 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv{}}% 10939 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2264}{\ensuremath\leq}% 10940 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2265}{\ensuremath\geq}% 10941 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2282}{\ensuremath\subset}% 10942 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2287}{\ensuremath\supseteq}% 10943 % 10944 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2016}{\ensuremath\Vert}% 10945 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2032}{\ensuremath\prime}% 10946 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{210F}{\ensuremath\hbar}% 10947 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2111}{\ensuremath\Im}% 10948 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2113}{\ensuremath\ell}% 10949 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2118}{\ensuremath\wp}% 10950 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{211C}{\ensuremath\Re}% 10951 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2135}{\ensuremath\aleph}% 10952 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2190}{\ensuremath\leftarrow}% 10953 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2191}{\ensuremath\uparrow}% 10954 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2193}{\ensuremath\downarrow}% 10955 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2194}{\ensuremath\leftrightarrow}% 10956 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2195}{\ensuremath\updownarrow}% 10957 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2196}{\ensuremath\nwarrow}% 10958 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2197}{\ensuremath\nearrow}% 10959 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2198}{\ensuremath\searrow}% 10960 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2199}{\ensuremath\swarrow}% 10961 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21A6}{\ensuremath\mapsto}% 10962 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21A9}{\ensuremath\hookleftarrow}% 10963 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21AA}{\ensuremath\hookrightarrow}% 10964 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BC}{\ensuremath\leftharpoonup}% 10965 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BD}{\ensuremath\leftharpoondown}% 10966 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21C0}{\ensuremath\rightharpoonup}% 10967 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21C1}{\ensuremath\rightharpoondown}% 10968 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21CC}{\ensuremath\rightleftharpoons}% 10969 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D0}{\ensuremath\Leftarrow}% 10970 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D1}{\ensuremath\Uparrow}% 10971 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D3}{\ensuremath\Downarrow}% 10972 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D4}{\ensuremath\Leftrightarrow}% 10973 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D5}{\ensuremath\Updownarrow}% 10974 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2202}{\ensuremath\partial}% 10975 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2205}{\ensuremath\emptyset}% 10976 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2207}{\ensuremath\nabla}% 10977 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2209}{\ensuremath\notin}% 10978 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{220B}{\ensuremath\owns}% 10979 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{220F}{\ensuremath\prod}% 10980 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2210}{\ensuremath\coprod}% 10981 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2211}{\ensuremath\sum}% 10982 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2213}{\ensuremath\mp}% 10983 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2218}{\ensuremath\circ}% 10984 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221A}{\ensuremath\surd}% 10985 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221D}{\ensuremath\propto}% 10986 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2220}{\ensuremath\angle}% 10987 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2223}{\ensuremath\mid}% 10988 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2228}{\ensuremath\vee}% 10989 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222A}{\ensuremath\cup}% 10990 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222B}{\ensuremath\smallint}% 10991 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222E}{\ensuremath\oint}% 10992 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{223C}{\ensuremath\sim}% 10993 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2240}{\ensuremath\wr}% 10994 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2243}{\ensuremath\simeq}% 10995 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2245}{\ensuremath\cong}% 10996 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2248}{\ensuremath\approx}% 10997 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{224D}{\ensuremath\asymp}% 10998 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2250}{\ensuremath\doteq}% 10999 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2260}{\ensuremath\neq}% 11000 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{226A}{\ensuremath\ll}% 11001 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{226B}{\ensuremath\gg}% 11002 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{227A}{\ensuremath\prec}% 11003 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{227B}{\ensuremath\succ}% 11004 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2283}{\ensuremath\supset}% 11005 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2286}{\ensuremath\subseteq}% 11006 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{228E}{\ensuremath\uplus}% 11007 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2291}{\ensuremath\sqsubseteq}% 11008 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2292}{\ensuremath\sqsupseteq}% 11009 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2293}{\ensuremath\sqcap}% 11010 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2294}{\ensuremath\sqcup}% 11011 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2295}{\ensuremath\oplus}% 11012 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2296}{\ensuremath\ominus}% 11013 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2297}{\ensuremath\otimes}% 11014 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2298}{\ensuremath\oslash}% 11015 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2299}{\ensuremath\odot}% 11016 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A2}{\ensuremath\vdash}% 11017 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A3}{\ensuremath\dashv}% 11018 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A4}{\ensuremath\ptextop}% 11019 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A5}{\ensuremath\bot}% 11020 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A8}{\ensuremath\models}% 11021 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C0}{\ensuremath\bigwedge}% 11022 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C1}{\ensuremath\bigvee}% 11023 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C2}{\ensuremath\bigcap}% 11024 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C3}{\ensuremath\bigcup}% 11025 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C4}{\ensuremath\diamond}% 11026 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C5}{\ensuremath\cdot}% 11027 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C6}{\ensuremath\star}% 11028 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C8}{\ensuremath\bowtie}% 11029 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2308}{\ensuremath\lceil}% 11030 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2309}{\ensuremath\rceil}% 11031 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{230A}{\ensuremath\lfloor}% 11032 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{230B}{\ensuremath\rfloor}% 11033 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2322}{\ensuremath\frown}% 11034 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2323}{\ensuremath\smile}% 11035 % 11036 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25B3}{\ensuremath\triangle}% 11037 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25B7}{\ensuremath\triangleright}% 11038 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25BD}{\ensuremath\bigtriangledown}% 11039 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25C1}{\ensuremath\triangleleft}% 11040 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25C7}{\ensuremath\diamond}% 11041 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2660}{\ensuremath\spadesuit}% 11042 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2661}{\ensuremath\heartsuit}% 11043 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2662}{\ensuremath\diamondsuit}% 11044 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2663}{\ensuremath\clubsuit}% 11045 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266D}{\ensuremath\flat}% 11046 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266E}{\ensuremath\natural}% 11047 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266F}{\ensuremath\sharp}% 11048 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{26AA}{\ensuremath\bigcirc}% 11049 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27B9}{\ensuremath\rangle}% 11050 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27C2}{\ensuremath\perp}% 11051 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27E8}{\ensuremath\langle}% 11052 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F5}{\ensuremath\longleftarrow}% 11053 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F6}{\ensuremath\longrightarrow}% 11054 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F7}{\ensuremath\longleftrightarrow}% 11055 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27FC}{\ensuremath\longmapsto}% 11056 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{29F5}{\ensuremath\setminus}% 11057 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A00}{\ensuremath\bigodot}% 11058 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A01}{\ensuremath\bigoplus}% 11059 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A02}{\ensuremath\bigotimes}% 11060 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A04}{\ensuremath\biguplus}% 11061 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A06}{\ensuremath\bigsqcup}% 11062 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A3F}{\ensuremath\amalg}% 11063 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2AAF}{\ensuremath\preceq}% 11064 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2AB0}{\ensuremath\succeq}% 11065 % 11066 \global\mathchardef\checkmark="1370% actually the square root sign 11067 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2713}{\ensuremath\checkmark}% 11068}% end of \unicodechardefs 11069 11070% UTF-8 byte sequence (pdfTeX) definitions (replacing and @U command) 11071% It makes the setting that replace UTF-8 byte sequence. 11072\def\utfeightchardefs{% 11073 \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterUTFviii 11074 \unicodechardefs 11075} 11076 11077% Whether the active definitions of non-ASCII characters expand to 11078% non-active tokens with the same character code. This is used to 11079% write characters literally, instead of using active definitions for 11080% printing the correct glyphs. 11081\newif\ifpassthroughchars 11082\passthroughcharsfalse 11083 11084% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX), 11085% provide a definition macro to replace/pass-through a Unicode character 11086% 11087\def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNative#1#2{% 11088 \catcode"#1=\active 11089 \def\dodeclareunicodecharacternative##1##2##3{% 11090 \begingroup 11091 \uccode`\~="##2\relax 11092 \uppercase{\gdef~}{% 11093 \ifpassthroughchars 11094 ##1% 11095 \else 11096 ##3% 11097 \fi 11098 } 11099 \endgroup 11100 } 11101 \begingroup 11102 \uccode`\.="#1\relax 11103 \uppercase{\def\UTFNativeTmp{.}}% 11104 \expandafter\dodeclareunicodecharacternative\UTFNativeTmp{#1}{#2}% 11105 \endgroup 11106} 11107 11108% Native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX) character replacing definition. 11109% It activates the setting that replaces Unicode characters. 11110\def\nativeunicodechardefs{% 11111 \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNative 11112 \unicodechardefs 11113} 11114 11115% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX), 11116% make the character token expand 11117% to the sequences given in \unicodechardefs for printing. 11118\def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeAtU#1#2{% 11119 \def\UTFAtUTmp{#2} 11120 \expandafter\globallet\csname uni:#1\endcsname \UTFAtUTmp 11121} 11122 11123% @U command definitions for native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX). 11124\def\nativeunicodechardefsatu{% 11125 \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeAtU 11126 \unicodechardefs 11127} 11128 11129% US-ASCII character definitions. 11130\def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done 11131 \relax 11132} 11133 11134% Define all Unicode characters we know about. This makes UTF-8 the default 11135% input encoding and allows @U to work. 11136\iftxinativeunicodecapable 11137 \nativeunicodechardefsatu 11138\else 11139 \utfeightchardefs 11140\fi 11141 11142\message{formatting,} 11143 11144\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt 11145 11146\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt 11147\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt 11148\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt 11149 11150% Prevent underfull vbox error messages. 11151\vbadness = 10000 11152 11153% Don't be very finicky about underfull hboxes, either. 11154\hbadness = 6666 11155 11156% Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans. 11157\widowpenalty=10000 11158\clubpenalty=10000 11159 11160% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're 11161% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of 11162% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on 11163% \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set. 11164% 11165\def\setemergencystretch{% 11166 \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined 11167 % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. 11168 \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% 11169 \else 11170 \emergencystretch = .15\hsize 11171 \fi 11172} 11173 11174% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 11175% 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; 11176% 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width. 11177% 11178% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define 11179% \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip. 11180% 11181\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{% 11182 \voffset = #3\relax 11183 \topskip = #6\relax 11184 \splittopskip = \topskip 11185 % 11186 \vsize = #1\relax 11187 \advance\vsize by \topskip 11188 \outervsize = \vsize 11189 \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin 11190 \txipageheight = \vsize 11191 % 11192 \hsize = #2\relax 11193 \outerhsize = \hsize 11194 \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in 11195 \txipagewidth = \hsize 11196 % 11197 \normaloffset = #4\relax 11198 \bindingoffset = #5\relax 11199 % 11200 \ifpdf 11201 \pdfpageheight #7\relax 11202 \pdfpagewidth #8\relax 11203 % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of 11204 % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with. 11205 \pdfhorigin = 1 true in 11206 \pdfvorigin = 1 true in 11207 \else 11208 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 11209 \special{papersize=#8,#7}% 11210 \else 11211 \pdfpageheight #7\relax 11212 \pdfpagewidth #8\relax 11213 % XeTeX does not have \pdfhorigin and \pdfvorigin. 11214 \fi 11215 \fi 11216 % 11217 \setleading{\textleading} 11218 % 11219 \parindent = \defaultparindent 11220 \setemergencystretch 11221} 11222 11223% @letterpaper (the default). 11224\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 11225 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 11226 \textleading = 13.2pt 11227 % 11228 % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even. 11229 \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines 11230 {\voffset}{.25in}% 11231 {\bindingoffset}{36pt}% 11232 {11in}{8.5in}% 11233}} 11234 11235% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size. 11236\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1 11237 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt 11238 \textleading = 12pt 11239 % 11240 \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}% 11241 {-.2in}{0in}% 11242 {\bindingoffset}{16pt}% 11243 {9.25in}{7in}% 11244 % 11245 \lispnarrowing = 0.3in 11246 \tolerance = 700 11247 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 11248 \defbodyindent = .5cm 11249}} 11250 11251% Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size. 11252% (Just testing, parameters still in flux.) 11253\def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1 11254 \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt 11255 \textleading = 12pt 11256 % 11257 \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}% 11258 {-.2in}{-.4in}% 11259 {0pt}{14pt}% 11260 {9in}{6in}% 11261 % 11262 \lispnarrowing = 0.25in 11263 \tolerance = 700 11264 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 11265 \defbodyindent = .4cm 11266}} 11267 11268% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. 11269\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 11270 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 11271 \textleading = 13.2pt 11272 % 11273 % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050 11274 % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm. 11275 % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust 11276 % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then 11277 % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in 11278 % your texinfo source file like this: 11279 % @tex 11280 % \global\normaloffset = -6mm 11281 % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm 11282 % @end tex 11283 \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines 11284 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% 11285 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% 11286 {297mm}{210mm}% 11287 % 11288 \tolerance = 700 11289 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 11290 \defbodyindent = 5mm 11291}} 11292 11293% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper. 11294% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000. 11295% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small. 11296\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1 11297 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt 11298 \textleading = 12.5pt 11299 % 11300 \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}% 11301 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% 11302 {\bindingoffset}{8pt}% 11303 {210mm}{148mm}% 11304 % 11305 \lispnarrowing = 0.2in 11306 \tolerance = 800 11307 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 11308 \defbodyindent = 2mm 11309 \tableindent = 12mm 11310}} 11311 11312% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. 11313\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1 11314 \afourpaper 11315 \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}% 11316 {\voffset}{4.6mm}% 11317 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% 11318 {297mm}{210mm}% 11319 % 11320 % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper. 11321 \globaldefs = 0 11322}} 11323 11324% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format. 11325\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1 11326 \afourpaper 11327 \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}% 11328 {\voffset}{-2.95mm}% 11329 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% 11330 {297mm}{210mm}% 11331 \globaldefs = 0 11332}} 11333 11334\def\bsixpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 11335 \afourpaper 11336 \internalpagesizes{140mm}{100mm}% 11337 {-6.35mm}{-12.7mm}% 11338 {\bindingoffset}{14pt}% 11339 {176mm}{125mm}% 11340 \let\SETdispenvsize=\smallword 11341 \lispnarrowing = 0.2in 11342 \globaldefs = 0 11343}} 11344 11345 11346% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH] 11347% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip, 11348% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow. 11349% 11350\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish} 11351\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{% 11352 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi 11353 \globaldefs = 1 11354 % 11355 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 11356 \setleading{\textleading}% 11357 % 11358 \dimen0 = #1\relax 11359 \advance\dimen0 by 2.5in % default 1in margin above heading line 11360 % and 1.5in to include heading, footing and 11361 % bottom margin 11362 % 11363 \dimen2 = \hsize 11364 \advance\dimen2 by 2in % default to 1 inch margin on each side 11365 % 11366 \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}% 11367 {\voffset}{\normaloffset}% 11368 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% 11369 {\dimen0}{\dimen2}% 11370}} 11371 11372% Set default to letter. 11373% 11374\letterpaper 11375 11376% Default value of \hfuzz, for suppressing warnings about overfull hboxes. 11377\hfuzz = 1pt 11378 11379 11380\message{and turning on texinfo input format.} 11381 11382\def^^L{\par} % remove \outer, so ^L can appear in an @comment 11383 11384% DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice. 11385\catcode`\^^? = 14 11386 11387% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. 11388\catcode`\"=\other \def\normaldoublequote{"} 11389\catcode`\$=\other \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix 11390\catcode`\+=\other \def\normalplus{+} 11391\catcode`\<=\other \def\normalless{<} 11392\catcode`\>=\other \def\normalgreater{>} 11393\catcode`\^=\other \def\normalcaret{^} 11394\catcode`\_=\other \def\normalunderscore{_} 11395\catcode`\|=\other \def\normalverticalbar{|} 11396\catcode`\~=\other \def\normaltilde{~} 11397 11398% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt 11399% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts, 11400% where something hairier probably needs to be done. 11401% 11402% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print 11403% otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero 11404% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all 11405% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter. 11406% 11407\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi} 11408 11409% Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches 11410% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from 11411% italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway 11412% this is not a problem. 11413\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi} 11414 11415% Set catcodes for Texinfo file 11416 11417% Active characters for printing the wanted glyph. 11418% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can 11419% use math or other variants that look better in normal text. 11420% 11421\catcode`\"=\active 11422\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}} 11423\let"=\activedoublequote 11424\catcode`\~=\active \def\activetilde{{\tt\char126}} \let~ = \activetilde 11425\chardef\hatchar=`\^ 11426\catcode`\^=\active \def\activehat{{\tt \hatchar}} \let^ = \activehat 11427 11428\catcode`\_=\active 11429\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} 11430\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em } 11431\let\realunder=_ 11432 11433\catcode`\|=\active \def|{{\tt\char124}} 11434 11435\chardef \less=`\< 11436\catcode`\<=\active \def\activeless{{\tt \less}}\let< = \activeless 11437\chardef \gtr=`\> 11438\catcode`\>=\active \def\activegtr{{\tt \gtr}}\let> = \activegtr 11439\catcode`\+=\active \def+{{\tt \char 43}} 11440\catcode`\$=\active \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix 11441\catcode`\-=\active \let-=\normaldash 11442 11443 11444% used for headline/footline in the output routine, in case the page 11445% breaks in the middle of an @tex block. 11446\def\texinfochars{% 11447 \let< = \activeless 11448 \let> = \activegtr 11449 \let~ = \activetilde 11450 \let^ = \activehat 11451 \setregularquotes 11452 \let\b = \strong 11453 \let\i = \smartitalic 11454 % in principle, all other definitions in \tex have to be undone too. 11455} 11456 11457% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after 11458% parsing them. 11459\def\turnoffactive{% 11460 \normalturnoffactive 11461 \otherbackslash 11462} 11463 11464\catcode`\@=0 11465 11466% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font, 11467% as in \char`\\. 11468\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\ 11469 11470% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other. 11471{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\}} 11472 11473% In Texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash 11474% in fixed width font. 11475\catcode`\\=\active % @ for escape char from now on. 11476 11477% Print a typewriter backslash. For math mode, we can't simply use 11478% \backslashcurfont: the story here is that in math mode, the \char 11479% of \backslashcurfont ends up printing the roman \ from the math symbol 11480% font (because \char in math mode uses the \mathcode, and plain.tex 11481% sets \mathcode`\\="026E). Hence we use an explicit \mathchar, 11482% which is the decimal equivalent of "715c (class 7, e.g., use \fam; 11483% ignored family value; char position "5C). We can't use " for the 11484% usual hex value because it has already been made active. 11485 11486@def@ttbackslash{{@tt @ifmmode @mathchar29020 @else @backslashcurfont @fi}} 11487@let@backslashchar = @ttbackslash % @backslashchar{} is for user documents. 11488 11489% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with 11490% catcode other. 11491@gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash} 11492 11493% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of 11494% the literal character `\'. 11495% 11496{@catcode`- = @active 11497 @gdef@normalturnoffactive{% 11498 @passthroughcharstrue 11499 @let-=@normaldash 11500 @let"=@normaldoublequote 11501 @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix 11502 @let+=@normalplus 11503 @let<=@normalless 11504 @let>=@normalgreater 11505 @let^=@normalcaret 11506 @let_=@normalunderscore 11507 @let|=@normalverticalbar 11508 @let~=@normaltilde 11509 @let\=@ttbackslash 11510 @setregularquotes 11511 @unsepspaces 11512 } 11513} 11514 11515% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file 11516% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line. 11517% So turn them off again, and have @fixbackslash turn them back on. 11518@catcode`+=@other @catcode`@_=@other 11519 11520% \enablebackslashhack - allow file to begin `\input texinfo' 11521% 11522% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up. 11523% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing 11524% a backslash. 11525% If the file did not have a `\input texinfo', then it is turned off after 11526% the first line; otherwise the first `\' in the file would cause an error. 11527% This is used on the very last line of this file, texinfo.tex. 11528% We also use @c to call @fixbackslash, in case ends of lines are hidden. 11529{ 11530@catcode`@^=7 11531@catcode`@^^M=13@gdef@enablebackslashhack{% 11532 @global@let\ = @eatinput% 11533 @catcode`@^^M=13% 11534 @def@c{@fixbackslash@c}% 11535 % Definition for the newline at the end of this file. 11536 @def ^^M{@let^^M@secondlinenl}% 11537 % Definition for a newline in the main Texinfo file. 11538 @gdef @secondlinenl{@fixbackslash}% 11539 % In case the first line has a whole-line command on it 11540 @let@originalparsearg@parsearg 11541 @def@parsearg{@fixbackslash@originalparsearg} 11542}} 11543 11544{@catcode`@^=7 @catcode`@^^M=13% 11545@gdef@eatinput input texinfo#1^^M{@fixbackslash}} 11546 11547% Emergency active definition of newline, in case an active newline token 11548% appears by mistake. 11549{@catcode`@^=7 @catcode13=13% 11550@gdef@enableemergencynewline{% 11551 @gdef^^M{% 11552 @par% 11553 %<warning: active newline>@par% 11554}}} 11555 11556 11557@gdef@fixbackslash{% 11558 @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @ttbackslash @fi 11559 @catcode13=5 % regular end of line 11560 @enableemergencynewline 11561 @let@c=@comment 11562 @let@parsearg@originalparsearg 11563 % Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input 11564 % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format. 11565 @catcode`+=@active 11566 @catcode`@_=@active 11567 % 11568 % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it. 11569 % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc. This macro, @fixbackslash, gets 11570 % called at the beginning of every Texinfo file. Not opening texinfo.cnf 11571 % directly in this file, texinfo.tex, makes it possible to make a format 11572 % file for Texinfo. 11573 % 11574 @openin 1 texinfo.cnf 11575 @ifeof 1 @else @input texinfo.cnf @fi 11576 @closein 1 11577} 11578 11579 11580% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages. 11581@escapechar = `@@ 11582 11583% These (along with & and #) are made active for url-breaking, so need 11584% active definitions as the normal characters. 11585@def@normaldot{.} 11586@def@normalquest{?} 11587@def@normalslash{/} 11588 11589% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. 11590% @hashchar{} gets its own user-level command, because of #line. 11591@catcode`@& = @other @def@normalamp{&} 11592@catcode`@# = @other @def@normalhash{#} 11593@catcode`@% = @other @def@normalpercent{%} 11594 11595@let @hashchar = @normalhash 11596 11597@c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and 11598@c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}. If we 11599@c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars. 11600@c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments. 11601@catcode`@'=@active 11602@catcode`@`=@active 11603@setregularquotes 11604 11605@c Local variables: 11606@c eval: (add-hook 'before-save-hook 'time-stamp nil t) 11607@c time-stamp-pattern: "texinfoversion{%Y-%02m-%02d.%02H}" 11608@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message\\|emacs-page" 11609@c End: 11610 11611@c vim:sw=2: 11612 11613@enablebackslashhack 11614 11615
